Honda 2012 Cr V Owners Manual
Honda-2012-Cr-V-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-107007 honda-2012-cr-v-unlinked-owners-manual-107007
Owners Manual Pdf 2012+Honda+CRV+OM 2012 Honda CR V Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
0A1212OM 2012 Honda CR-V Maintenance Schedule | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
2015-10-23
: Honda Honda-2012-Honda-Cr-V-Owners-Manual-816754 honda-2012-honda-cr-v-owners-manual-816754 honda pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 384
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2012 CR-V
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes
in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a
hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2011 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
P/N 00X31-T0A-6000
CR-V-31T0A600.book
0 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
2 Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26
Seat Belts P. 31
Airbags P. 39
2 Instrument Panel P. 69
Indicators P. 70
Gauges and Displays P. 79
2 Controls P. 97
Setting the Clock P. 98
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 100
Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 116
Adjusting the Seats P. 128
Climate Control System* P. 151
2 Features P. 155
Audio System P. 156
Audio System Basic Operation P. 159
General Information on the Audio System P. 210
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
2 Driving P. 245
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Before Driving P. 246
Towing a Trailer P. 251
Parking Your Vehicle P. 277 Multi-View Rear Camera * P. 278
2 Maintenance P. 285
Before Performing Maintenance P. 286
Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 316
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care * P. 331
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 339
Tools P. 340
Overheating P. 351
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 341
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 353
2 Information P. 363
Specifications P. 364
Emissions Testing P. 369
Identification Numbers P. 366
Warranty Coverages P. 371
CR-V-31T0A600.book
1 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 54
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 67
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 110 Security System P. 112
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 117
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 138
Rear Entertainment System * P. 193
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 214
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 257
Refueling P. 279
Audio Error Messages P. 205
Compass * P. 243
When Driving P. 259
Fuel Economy P. 282
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 114
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
Heating and Cooling System* P. 148
Audio Remote Controls P. 209
Braking P. 273
Accessories and Modifications P. 283
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 297
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 309
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320
Battery P. 329
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 333
Remote Transmitter Care P. 330
Cleaning P. 334
Engine Does Not Start P. 347
Fuses P. 357
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 350
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 361
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 367
Authorized Manuals P. 373
Jump Starting P. 348
Emergency Towing P. 360
Reporting Safety Defects P. 368
Customer Service Information P. 374
P. 2
Safety Labels P. 68
Safe Driving
P. 25
Instrument Panel
P. 69
Controls
P. 97
Features
P. 155
Driving
P. 245
Maintenance
P. 285
Handling the Unexpected
P. 339
Information
P. 363
Index
P. 375
CR-V-31T0A600.book
2 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ ECON Button (P 125)
❙ System Indicators (P 70)
❙ Gauges (P 79)
❙ Information Display (P 80)
❙ Multi-Information Display * (P 83)
❙ Audio Display *
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio System (P 156)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Heating and Cooling System *
(P 148)
❙ Climate Control System * (P 151)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 124)
❙ Heated Mirror Button * (P 124)
❙ Ignition Switch (P 117)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments
(P 125)
❙
2
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P 268)
CR-V-31T0A600.book
3 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
❙ (SEL/RESET) Knob (P 80)
❙ Brightness Control (P 123)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 118)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 120)
❙
(Display) Button * (P 83)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 121)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 265)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons * (P 214)
❙ MENU Button * (P 86)
❙ SOURCE Button (P 86)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 86)
* Not available on all models
3
CR-V-31T0A600.book
4 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Power Window Switches (P 114)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 105)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 127)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 126)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 358)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)
❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission
(P 262)
❙ Glove Box (P 139)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 141)
❙ Parking Brake (P 273)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 298)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 280)
❙ Driver’s Pocket
4
❙ Seat Heater Switches *
(P 145)
CR-V-31T0A600.book
5 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Cargo Area Light (P 138)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 62)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)
❙ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P 36)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 49)
❙ Rear Entertainment System * (P 193)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 138)
❙ Seat Belts (P 31)
❙ Moonroof Switch * (P 116)
❙ Map Lights (P 138)
❙ Sunglasses Holder (P 144)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Accessory Power Socket * (P 141)
❙ USB Adapter Cable (P 157)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack * (P 157)
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 141)
❙ Console Side Pocket
❙ Front Seat (P 128)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Coat Hook (P 142)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Rear Seat (P 135)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
* Not available on all models
5
CR-V-31T0A600.book
6 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 297)
❙ Audio Antenna (P 158)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 121, 316)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 127)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 102)
❙ Headlights (P 118, 309)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 118, 312)
❙ Side Marker Lights (P 118, 311)
❙ Tires (P 320, 341)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 120, 310)
❙ How to Refuel (P 280)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 315)
❙ Rear Wiper (P 122, 318)
❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate
(P 110)
❙ Tailgate Release Button (P 111)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera * (P 278)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 312)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 312)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 312)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 312)
6
CR-V-31T0A600.book
7 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Eco Assist System
(P 125)
Quick Reference Guide
Ambient Meter
● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Yellow: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button (P 125)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 77)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
* Not available on all models
7
CR-V-31T0A600.book
8 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Safe Driving
(P 25)
Quick Reference Guide
Airbags (P 39)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 54)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 67)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P 31)
Before Driving Checklist (P 30)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
8
CR-V-31T0A600.book
9 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Instrument Panel
(P 69)
System Indicators
System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
AWD System
Indicator *
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Indicator
Temperature Gauge
Ambient Meter
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Quick Reference Guide
Gauges (P 79)/Information Display (P 80)/
Multi-Information Display * (P 83)/System Indicators (P 70)
Low Fuel Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Door Open Indicator
U.S.
Tailgate Open
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
Speedometer
ECON Mode Indicator
Tachometer
Immobilizer System
Indicator
System Indicators
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Fuel
Gauge
Lights Reminders
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Canada
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control
Indicator
TPMS Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Fog Light Indicator *
Washer Level
Indicator *
* Not available on all models
9
CR-V-31T0A600.book
10 ページ
Controls
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
(P 97)
Quick Reference Guide
Turn Signals (P 118)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Lights (P 118)
Light Control Switches
Right
High Beam
Wipers and Washers
(P 121)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay
Low Beam
Flashing
Left
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
10
CR-V-31T0A600.book
11 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Steering Wheel (P 125)
Tailgate (P 110)
Power Windows (P 114)
● With all the doors unlocked, push the
tailgate release button on the tailgate to
open it.
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 104)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
Power Door Mirrors
(P 127)
Power Window Lock Button
Indicator
Quick Reference Guide
● With the ignition switch in ON (w , open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Window
Switch
● With the ignition switch in ON (w , move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
11
CR-V-31T0A600.book
12 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Heating and Cooling System * (P 148)
Quick Reference Guide
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.
Press the Mode buttons (
/
/
/
) to select the vents air flows from.
Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
Use the
button for maximum cool setting.
Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Button
Button
Button
Fan Control
Dial
Button
Button
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror *) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
12
CR-V-31T0A600.book
13 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Climate Control System * (P 151)
Clock (P 98)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Models without navigation system
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Driver's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(On/Off) Button
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
AUTO Button
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror *) Button
(Recirculation) Button
/
(Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
MODE Control Button
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Press the CLOCK (AUX) button until the
displayed time begins flashing.
b
Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
to set the time. Press Preset (6 (Reset)
to set the time to the nearest hour.
c
Press the CLOCK button again to set
the time.
Quick Reference Guide
Models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for complete
details.
a
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the
clock display begins to blink, then press the
(6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock
sets forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Models with navigation system
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
* Not available on all models
13
CR-V-31T0A600.book
14 ページ
Features
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
(P 155)
Quick Reference Guide
Audio System (P 156)
For navigation system operation () See Navigation System Manual
Models without multi-information display
(P 159)
(Power) Button
CD Slot
SCAN Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
(CD Eject) Button
Button
FM Button
AM Button
AUX Button
CD Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
(Sound) Button
Selector Knob
14
SETUP Button
Button
CR-V-31T0A600.book
15 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
● Audio Remote Controls (P 209)
Models with multi-information display (P 173)
(+ / (- Button
Button
SOURCE
Button
(Power)
Button
CD Slot
Button
AM Button
SCAN Button
FM Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)
(CD Eject)
Button
Button *
FM/AM Button *
CD Button
AUX Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
SKIP/SEEK Button
SETUP Button
Quick Reference Guide
/
Multi-Information Display
● (+ / (- Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
down.
● SOURCE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM1/FM2/AM/CD/XM1 */XM2 */AUX.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
Button
PHONE Button
Selector Knob
* Not available on all models
15
CR-V-31T0A600.book
16 ページ
Driving
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
(P 245)
Quick Reference Guide
Automatic Transmission (P 263)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Release Button
Shift Lever
Reverse
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
(d Button
Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
Drive (D3)
Press the (d button while the shift lever is in
(D .
Used when:
•Going up or down hills
•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
16
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
17 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
VSA® OFF Button (P 269)
Refueling (P 279)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 15.3 US gal (58 L)
a
Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.
b
Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
c
Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
d
After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
Cruise Control (P 265)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press –/SET once you have
received the desired speed (above 25 mph
or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 270)
● TPMS monitors tire pressure.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
Quick Reference Guide
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
17
CR-V-31T0A600.book
18 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Maintenance
Quick Reference Guide
Under the Hood (P 297)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
c
18
(P 285)
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Wiper Blades (P 316)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P 320)
Lights (P 309)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
● Inspect all lights regularly.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
19 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Handling the Unexpected
(P 339)
Engine Won't Start
(P 347)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Indicators Come On
(P 353)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Overheating (P 351)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Quick Reference Guide
Flat Tire (P 341)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.
Emergency Towing
Blown Fuse (P 357)
(P 360)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
19
CR-V-31T0A600.book
20 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
What to Do If
Quick Reference Guide
20
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q .
Why?
●
The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P .
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
21 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch.
● The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
● The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
21
CR-V-31T0A600.book
Quick Reference Guide
22
22 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recorders
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
23 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
Quick Reference Guide
A Few Words About Safety
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
23
CR-V-31T0A600.book
24
24 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
CR-V-31T0A600.book
25 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Important Handling Information......... 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 29
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 31
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 34
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags ...................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 49
Airbag System Indicators.................... 50
Airbag Care ....................................... 53
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......56
Safety of Larger Children ................... 65
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 67
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 68
25
CR-V-31T0A600.book
26 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
26
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
27 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
27
CR-V-31T0A600.book
28 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Important Handling Information
Safe Driving
28
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
1Important Handling Information
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Precautions While Driving P. 261
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 257
CR-V-31T0A600.book
29 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9
8
12
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
6
10
7
8
10
11
7
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
9
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
Continued
29
CR-V-31T0A600.book
30 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
■ Safety CheckList
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 128
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 131
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 34
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 54
30
1Safety CheckList
If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a
door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed.
Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the
indicator goes off.
2 Door Open Indicator P. 74
2 Tailgate Open Indicator P. 74
CR-V-31T0A600.book
31 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Safe Driving
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 62
Continued
31
CR-V-31T0A600.book
32 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Proper use of seat belts
1About Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
■ Seat Belt Reminder
1Seat Belt Reminder
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w before
the driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
32
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w .
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
33 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
Safe Driving
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
33
CR-V-31T0A600.book
34 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 128
Safe Driving
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Buckle
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Latch
Plate
34
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
CR-V-31T0A600.book
35 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Safe Driving
Lap belt
as low as
possible
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
Push
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
Push
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Continued
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
35
CR-V-31T0A600.book
36 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.
Small Latch Plate
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
3 WARNING
Safe Driving
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch
Plate
Buckle
36
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
Small Latch Plate
CR-V-31T0A600.book
37 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
37
CR-V-31T0A600.book
38 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Safe Driving
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
38
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
39 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Airbags
Airbag System Components
a c kl
i h
a
g j j
b
e
Safe Driving
h
c
n
d
b
f
h
h
e
h
m
h
Continued
39
CR-V-31T0A600.book
40 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
d An electronic control unit that continually
monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w .
sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front or side collision.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
e Automatic
front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
b Two
side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c Two
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
j Sensors
that can detect if a child or small
statured adult is in the deployment path
of the front passenger's side airbag.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
fA
40
h Impact
driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l An indicator on the instrument panel that
g Weight
sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
alerts you that the front passenger's side
airbag has been turned off.
m Safing
nA
Sensor
rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
41 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
■ Important Facts About Your Airbags
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries,
sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and
sitting correctly.
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
41
CR-V-31T0A600.book
42 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
1Types of Airbags
Front Airbags (SRS)
1Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
42
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w .
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
43 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ Operation
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
■ How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Continued
After a front airbag inflates in a crash, you may see
what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from
the airbag's surface. Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory problems may
experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,
get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
43
CR-V-31T0A600.book
44 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Safe Driving
44
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
45 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
Although Honda recommends against
carrying an infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of a child (up to
about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn off the passenger's front
airbag.
45
CR-V-31T0A600.book
46 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate to severe side impact.
Safe Driving
■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location
■ Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
46
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
47 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
Continued
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
47
CR-V-31T0A600.book
48 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
■ Side Airbag Cutoff System
Safe Driving
To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side
airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
• The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front
passenger seat.
• The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the
deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes
on.
2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 52
■ Side Airbag Off Indicator
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few
seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be
turned on, and the indicator will go off.
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit
properly restrained in a rear seat.
48
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
Sensor that
monitor the
passenger’s height.
Sensor that monitor
the passenger’s position.
The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height
and body position may not work if:
• The seat-back is wet
• The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
• A seat cushion is on the seat
• The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
CR-V-31T0A600.book
49 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger's side will deploy, and
the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are
no passengers on that side of the vehicle.
Safe Driving
Side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
Continued
49
CR-V-31T0A600.book
50 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
Safe Driving
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.
■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
50
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
51 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.
Canada
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the passenger airbag off
• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
Safe Driving
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant
or small child, on the seat.
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
2 Child Safety P. 54
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Continued
51
CR-V-31T0A600.book
52 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
■ Side Airbag Off Indicator
1Side Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the side airbag off indicator comes on
Safe Driving
U.S.
Canada
This indicator comes on if the passenger's side
airbag has been turned off because the
passenger is too small to be sitting in the front
seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has
leaned into the airbag's deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured
adult or a child, the indicator should go off
when the passenger returns to a proper
upright sitting position.
52
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the
indicator should come on for a few seconds and then
go out. If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in the front seat,
have the system checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
53 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
1Airbag Care
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
53
CR-V-31T0A600.book
54 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
Safe Driving
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
54
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
55 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came
with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has
labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 68
55
CR-V-31T0A600.book
56 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
56
CR-V-31T0A600.book
57 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Continued
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
57
CR-V-31T0A600.book
58 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
58
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
59 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in rear seats. A child seat is attached
to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Marks
Lower Anchors
Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Continued
59
CR-V-31T0A600.book
60 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Outer position
Tether
Strap
Hook
Outer position
3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
4. Go to step 7.
Anchor
Center position
Center Lower Anchor
60
Cover
Center position
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
4. Open the anchor cover.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
61 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Center position
Anchor
All models
Tether Strap
Hook
7. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
8. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
9. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Continued
Safe Driving
5. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
61
CR-V-31T0A600.book
62 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
62
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
63 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
1Adding Security with a Tether
■ Adding Security with a Tether
Anchor Fitting
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Safe Driving
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Two tether anchorage points are provided
behind the rear outer seating positions and
one in the ceiling for the rear center. A child
seat that is installed with a seat belt and
comes with a tether can use the tether for
additional security.
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether Anchorage Points
Continued
63
CR-V-31T0A600.book
64 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Tether
Strap
Hook
Safe Driving
Anchor
Anchor
Tether Strap
Hook
64
■ Using an outer anchor
1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
2. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
■ Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
65 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
1Safety of Larger Children
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Continued
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
Safe Driving
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
65
CR-V-31T0A600.book
66 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
■ Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
66
CR-V-31T0A600.book
67 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control
system * as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
Safe Driving
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
* Not available on all models
67
CR-V-31T0A600.book
68 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
Safe Driving
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Canadian models
Sun Visor
U.S. models only
Doorjambs
U.S. models
Dashboard
U.S. models only
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
68
CR-V-31T0A600.book
69 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 70
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 79
Information Display............................ 80
Multi-Information Display *................. 83
* Not available on all models
69
CR-V-31T0A600.book
70 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Indicators
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
U.S.
Instrument Panel
Canada
●
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
●
●
●
●
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
70
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w , then
goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if you drive with the parking
brake not fully released.
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w , and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is
low.
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking
brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while
driving P. 355
●
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator Comes On P. 355
Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 353
CR-V-31T0A600.book
71 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
●
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w , and goes off either when the
engine starts or after several seconds if the
engine is not started. If "readiness codes"
have not been set, it blinks five times before it
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders
is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics
for the emissions control systems.
●
Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where
there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for
10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w , and goes off when the engine
starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
●
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 369
●
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks P. 354
Instrument Panel
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Explanation
Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating and
cooling system */climate control system * system and
rear defogger in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 353
Indicates current shift lever position.
(d indicator:
● Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
● Comes on when you press the (d button
while the shift lever is in (D .
●
* Not available on all models
2 Shifting P. 263
Continued
71
CR-V-31T0A600.book
72 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Transmission
Indicator
●
Instrument Panel
●
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
●
Low Fuel
Indicator
72
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and
acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are
not wearing a seat belt when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w . If the front
passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the
indicator comes on about six seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
●
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you
and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has
fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running
low (approximately 2.3 U.S. gal./8.6 Liter
left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.
●
●
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 32
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
73 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator
On/Blinking
●
●
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
●
●
AWD System
Indicator *
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a
problem with the ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
AWD.
Blinks when the AWD system is overheated.
The system is inactive.
●
Stays on constantly - the engine drives the front
wheels only in this state. Have the vehicle checked by
a dealer.
Blinks while driving - the engine drives the front
wheels only in this state. Stop in a safe place, shift to
(P , and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If
the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle
to a dealer.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 275
●
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
2 REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™* P. 270
* Not available on all models
Continued
73
CR-V-31T0A600.book
74 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
●
●
●
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator
●
●
●
Door Open
Indicator
●
●
●
Tailgate Open
Indicator
74
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system.
Comes on if there is a problem with the hill
start assist system.
Explanation
●
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System P. 268
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 269
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if any door is not completely
closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes
on if any door is opened while driving.
●
Goes off when all doors are closed.
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if the tailgate is not completely
closed.
●
Goes off when the tailgate is closed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
75 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
EPS (Electric
Power Steering
System) Indicator
●
TPMS Indicator
●
●
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
●
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w , and goes off when the engine
starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering System).
●
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is
fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the
tires becomes significantly low.
Comes on for a while and then goes off
when a compact spare tire is temporarily
installed.
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
2 If the EPS Indicator Comes On P. 355
Continued
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
75
CR-V-31T0A600.book
76 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Turn Signal
Indicators
Instrument Panel
High Beam
Indicator
Lights On
Indicator
Fog Light
Indicator *
●
●
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or
in AUTO * when the exterior lights are on.
●
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
●
Canada
76
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
* Not available on all models
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on when the passenger side airbag
system is automatically shut off.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal
light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs
P. 312
Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
●
●
U.S.
The turn signal indicators blink when you
operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both
indicators and all turn signals blink at the
same time.
Explanation
—
●
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened.
—
●
●
●
It does not mean there is a problem with your side
airbags.
Comes on when nobody is sitting in the
passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat Have the passenger sit properly.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
77 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
●
●
●
Security System
Alarm Indicator *
Blinks when the security system alarm has
been set.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0 , pull the key out, and then insert
the key and turn it to ON (w again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
2 Security System Alarm* P. 112
Instrument Panel
Immobilizer
System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.
Explanation
Indicator
ECON Mode
Indicator
* Not available on all models
●
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on when the ECON mode is on.
2 ECON Button P. 125
Continued
77
CR-V-31T0A600.book
78 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
Instrument Panel
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator *
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
78
* Not available on all models
On/Blinking
●
●
Comes on when you press the CRUISE
button.
2 Cruise Control P. 265
Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise
control.
2 Cruise Control P. 265
●
Comes on when washer fluid gets low.
●
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w , then goes off.
Comes on when the scheduled maintenance
is due soon.
●
Explanation
●
Refill washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 308
2 Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
CR-V-31T0A600.book
79 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w .
■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
1Fuel Gauge
Instrument Panel
■ Tachometer
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 351
79
CR-V-31T0A600.book
80 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Information Display
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
■ Switching the Display
Press the
(SEL/RESET) knob to change the display.
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instrument Panel
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy,
Average Fuel A, Trip Meter
A, Outside Temperature
■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Instant Fuel Economy,
Average Fuel B, Trip Meter
B, Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the multi-information display. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.
80
CR-V-31T0A600.book
81 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
■ Trip Meter
1Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
knob. The trip meter is
■ Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Instrument Panel
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
■ Check Fuel Cap
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 354
Continued
81
CR-V-31T0A600.book
82 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Instrument Panel
82
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road
heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the
temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less
than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Models with multi-information display
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 86
CR-V-31T0A600.book
83 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
Multi-Information Display *
Shows useful information, such as audio status. It also displays the compass
direction * and clock.
■ Switching the Display
Press the
(display) button to change the display.
Instrument Panel
Audio/HFL * display
123456
Display
Button
Fuel consumption
Full size analogue clock/
Wallpaper
Black screen
* Not available on all models
Continued
83
CR-V-31T0A600.book
84 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
Instrument Panel
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
■ Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■ Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
84
1Average Fuel Economy
You can choose an item to be displayed in the fuel
consumption screen. Range, elapsed time, or average
speed can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 86
CR-V-31T0A600.book
85 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance Minder™ P. 289
■ Compass Direction *
2 Compass * P. 243
■ Turn-by-Turn Directions *
1Turn-by-Turn Directions *
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
* Not available on all models
Continued
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 86
Instrument Panel
Shows the vehicle's traveling direction.
85
CR-V-31T0A600.book
86 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ Customized Features
1Customized Features
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
Instrument Panel
Select the Vehicle Menu screen by pressing the MENU button while the ignition
switch is in ON (w , and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Customize
Settings, then press the SOURCE button.
(+ Button
Press to scroll upwards.
Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
(- Button
Press to scroll downwards.
86
SOURCE Button
Press to set your selection.
Button
Press to go to the next
display.
MENU Button
Press to go to Vehicle Menu.
To customize other features, press the (+ / (button.
2 List of customizable options P. 89
2 Example of customizing wallpapers P. 92
When you customize settings:
Shift to (P .
CR-V-31T0A600.book
87 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ Customization flow
Press the MENU button.
1Customized Features
You can exit the customizing screen at any time by
pressing the MENU button.
Vehicle Menu
Vehicle Information
Instrument Panel
Adjust Clock *
* Not available on all models
Continued
87
CR-V-31T0A600.book
88 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
Customize Settings
Select Wallpaper
Import Wallpaper
Delete Wallpaper
Display Setup
Trip Meter Item to Display
Welcome Screen
Instrument Panel
Color Theme
Turn by Turn Display *
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Trip A reset trigger
Trip Computer Setup
Trip B reset trigger
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Interior Light Dimming Time
Lighting Setup
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Door Lock Mode
Door Setup
Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
Security Relock Timer
Default All
88
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
89 ページ
２０１１年７月１７日 日曜日 午後５時３２分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ List of customizable options
Setup Group
Vehicle
Information
Customizable Features
Maintenance info
No/Yes
Sets time display 12 hour or 24 hour and adjust the time.
12 h*2/24 h
Select
Wallpaper
Select the full-size analogue clock or the wallpaper.
Clock*2/Image 1/Image 2/
Image 3
Import
Wallpaper
Import an image file for a new wallpaper.
Delete
Wallpaper
Delete an image file for a wallpaper.
Image 1/Image 2/Image 3
Trip Meter
Item to
Display
Select an item to be displayed along with average
fuel economy.
Range*2/Elapsed time/
Average speed
Welcome
Screen
Select whether the welcome screen comes on or not
when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
On*2/Off
Color Theme
Changes the color of the screen.
Blue*2/Red/Amber/Gray
Turn by Turn
Display *1, *3
Select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on or
not during the route guidance.
On*2/Off
Language
Selection
Changes the displayed language.
English*2/Francais/Español
Three images can be stored.
2 Importing wallpapers
from USB P. 92
Instrument Panel
Display
Setup
Selectable settings
Reset the Maintenance MinderTM.
Adjust Clock*1
Customize
Settings
Description
*1: Not available on all models
*2: Default Setting
*3: Refer to the navigation system manual for complete details.
Continued
89
CR-V-31T0A600.book
90 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Instrument Panel
Trip
Computer
Setup
Customize
Settings
Lighting
Setup
*1: Default Setting
90
Description
Selectable settings
Adjust
Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
Trip A reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
With Refuel/Manual only*1/
IGN OFF
Trip B reset
trigger
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
With Refuel/Manual only*1/
IGN OFF
Fuel Efficiency
Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Interior Light
Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight
Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on
after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light
Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid/Low/Min*1
CR-V-31T0A600.book
91 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
Setup Group
Door
Setup
Default
All
Description
Selectable settings
Auto Door
Lock
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
Off/With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from (P
Door Lock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or ignition key.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Auto Door
Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
Off/
Driver Door with Shift to (P *1/
All Doors with Shift to (P /
Driver Door with IGN Off/
All Doors with IGN Off
Keyless Lock
Acknowledgment
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security
Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Instrument Panel
Customize
Settings
Customizable Features
Cancel
Reset All Defaults
*1:Default Setting
Continued
91
CR-V-31T0A600.book
92 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
■ Example of customizing wallpapers
1Customized Features
You can customize the display from clock to wallpaper.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
Instrument Panel
•
•
•
Importing wallpapers from USB
You can import up to three images, one at a time for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
Select Import Wallpaper from Customize Settings and properly connect a USB
flash drive to store an image.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter
cable.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (button, then press the SOURCE button.
92
•
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size was less than 480 x 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
The number of files that can be selected is up to
255.
Up to 64 characters can be displayed in the file
name.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
93 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
5. Select Import Wallpaper with the (+ / (button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The file names are displayed on the
screen.
Instrument Panel
6. Press the (- button until the file name you
want to store appears on the center of the
display, then press the SOURCE button.
7. The preview of the imported data is
displayed. Press the SOURCE button if it is
OK.
8. Press the SOURCE button to save the
image file.
Save
Continued
93
CR-V-31T0A600.book
94 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
9. Select the location you want to store the
image file in with the (+ / (- button, then
press the SOURCE button.
10.Press the MENU button to exit the
customizing screen.
Instrument Panel
94
CR-V-31T0A600.book
95 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
Selecting a wallpaper
5. Select the image file you want with the
(+ / (- button, then press the SOURCE
button.
u When the scroll is stopped, the
thumbnail is displayed.
6. Press the MENU button to exit the
customizing screen.
Instrument Panel
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Customize Settings with the (+ /
(- button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Select Display Setup with the (+ / (button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Select Select Wallpaper with the (+ / (button, then press the SOURCE button.
95
CR-V-31T0A600.book
96
96 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
CR-V-31T0A600.book
97 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock ................................ 98
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 102
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 104
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 105
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 106
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 110
Security System ................................ 112
Immobilizer System .......................... 112
Security System Alarm * .................... 112
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 114
* Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ...... 116
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch................................. 117
Turn Signals ..................................... 118
Light Switches.................................. 118
Fog Lights * ...................................... 120
Daytime Running Lights ................... 120
Wipers and Washers ........................ 121
Brightness Control ........................... 123
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
Button ........................................... 124
ECON Button ................................... 125
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 125
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 126
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 126
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 127
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 128
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 128
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 138
Interior Lights .................................. 138
Interior Convenience Items .............. 139
Heating and Cooling System * ......... 148
Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 148
Climate Control System * .................. 151
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 151
Automatic Climate Control Sensors . 154
97
CR-V-31T0A600.book
98 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Setting the Clock
Clock
Models with multi-information display
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w .
■ Using the MENU button
Controls
98
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Adjust Clock with the (+ / (- button, then press the SOURCE button.
3. Press the (+ / (- button to change the
setting between 12 H and 24 H.
4. Select hour or minute with the /
button.
5. Press the (+ / (- button to adjust the
numbers up or down.
6. Select Set with the /
button, then
press the SOURCE button to enter your
selection.
uThe display will return to the Adjust
Clock display.
■ Using the SETUP button
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Adjust Clock, then press .
3. Rotate
to select the item you want to change (12/24 hour mode, hour,
minute). Then press .
4. Rotate
to make the adjustment.
5. Press to enter your selection. The display returns to Adjust Clock. Repeat steps
4 to 6 to adjust other items.
6. To enter the selection, Rotate
and select Set, then press .
7. Press the SETUP button to go back to the normal display.
1Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
To set the time to the nearest hour:
Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock
display begins to blink, then press the (6 (Reset)
button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
99 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSetting the ClockuClock
Models without multi-information display
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w .
■ To set up the time
Controls
1. Press the SETUP button until ADJUST
HOUR appears.
2. Rotate
to adjust the hours.
3. Press . The display switches to minute
adjustment.
4. Rotate
to adjust the minutes.
5. Press
to complete clock adjustment.
■ To set up the clock mode
1. Press the SETUP button until CLOCK MODE appears.
2. Rotate
to select mode, then press .
99
CR-V-31T0A600.book
100 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
■ Master Keys
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.
You can also use the remote transmitter to
lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.
Controls
100
1Key Types and Functions
All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 112
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
101 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
■ Valet Key
Gray
1Valet Key
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.
1Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Controls
■ Key Number Tag
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
101
CR-V-31T0A600.book
102 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Locking the doors
LED
Controls
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights will flash, all the
doors and tailgate will lock, and the
security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 86
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 138
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or
the tailgate is open.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 330
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 86
102
CR-V-31T0A600.book
103 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all of the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
Models with multi-information display
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 86
■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Controls
Unlock
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
■ Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch, and
any door or the tailgate is open.
103
CR-V-31T0A600.book
104 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock
Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock
Pull the lock tab rearward.
Controls
■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
Pull the front door inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Inner
Handle
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at
the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 105
104
CR-V-31T0A600.book
105 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
To Lock
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the either front door using the
master door lock switch, hatch, and fuel fill door all
the other doors lock/unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Controls
Master Door
Lock Switch
Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
Unlock
Lock
105
CR-V-31T0A600.book
106 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.
■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Auto Door Unlocking
Controls
■ Park unlock mode
The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal
depressed.
106
* Not available on all models
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Models without multi-information display
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting * P. 107
Models with multi-information display
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display.
2 Customized Features P. 86
CR-V-31T0A600.book
107 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.
■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
■ Auto door locking
Mode
Description
All doors and the tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Park Lock Mode
All doors and the tailgate lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Off
The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.
Controls
Drive Lock Mode *1
■ Auto door unlocking
Mode
Description
Driver’s door unlocks
*1
All doors and the tailgate unlock
Park Unlock Mode
When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition Switch Unlock Driver’s door unlocks
Mode
When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w .
Off
All doors and the tailgate unlock
The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.
*1: Default setting
* Not available on all models
Continued
107
CR-V-31T0A600.book
108 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *
■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps
Drive Lock Mode*1
Park Lock Mode
Controls
1
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever out of (P with the
brake pedal depressed.
2
The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.
Open the driver’s door.
3
Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P .
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P .
Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more
than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
Press and hold the front of the master
door lock switch on the driver’s door for
more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear one click.
4
5
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.
uCustomization is completed.
*1: Default setting
108
Off
CR-V-31T0A600.book
109 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting *
■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Ignition Switch Unlock Mode
Steps
To unlock driver’s
door
To unlock all doors
Park Unlock Mode
To unlock driver’s
door*1
Off
To unlock all doors
Apply the parking brake.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake
Move the shift lever to (P .
pedal depressed.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P .
2
The driver’s door must be closed at this stage.
Open the driver’s door.
3
Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
Controls
1
Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. You will hear a click twice.
4
Keep pressing the switch
for another five seconds Release the switch.
to hear one more click.
5
Release the switch.
6
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q within 20 seconds.
uCustomization is completed.
Keep pressing the switch
for another five seconds Release the switch.
to hear one more click.
*1: Default setting
109
CR-V-31T0A600.book
110 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
■ Opening the tailgate
• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
■ Closing the tailgate
Controls
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 67
110
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate
and the cargo area when closing the gate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
111 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button
Using the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate
is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button
and lift open the tailgate.
Tailgate
Release
Button
Controls
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
Inner Handle
111
CR-V-31T0A600.book
112 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.
Controls
Security System Alarm *
The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened
without the key, or remote transmitter.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, or remote transmitter. The system, along with the
horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
112
* Not available on all models
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm *
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
113 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm *
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 , and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and tailgate are closed.
• All doors are locked with the key or the remote transmitter.
1Security System Alarm *
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master
door lock switch.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or
remote transmitter, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w . The security system
alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
Controls
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
Panic
Button
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
* Not available on all models
113
CR-V-31T0A600.book
114 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w , using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open
and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed
in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the
driver's seat.
Controls
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.
■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function *
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Indicator
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
114
* Not available on all models
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
115 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Open
Controls
115
CR-V-31T0A600.book
116 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w . Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
Open
release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
Controls
Close
Tilt
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
116
* Not available on all models
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
117 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
1Ignition Switch
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
Controls
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
117
CR-V-31T0A600.book
118 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals
Right Turn
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w .
Left Turn
Controls
Light Switches
1Light Switches
■ Manual Operation
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
118
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 76
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
119 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
■ Automatic Lighting Control *
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w .
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Controls
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
1Automatic Lighting Control *
Light Sensor
2 Customized Features P. 86
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver's door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 86
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 with the headlight switch on, but do not
open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the
AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
* Not available on all models
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright
Dark
119
CR-V-31T0A600.book
120 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *
Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w .
• The headlight switch is off, or in
.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
120
* Not available on all models
1Fog Lights *
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 76
CR-V-31T0A600.book
121 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers
■ Front Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w .
Pull to
use
washer.
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
NOTICE
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
■ Adjusting the delay *
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Controls
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring *
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Long delay
HI: High speed wipe
Short delay
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
* Not available on all models
Continued
121
CR-V-31T0A600.book
122 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
■ Rear Wiper/Washer
1Rear Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w .
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
Controls
■ Washer (
INT: Intermittent
ON: Continuous wipe
OFF
Washer
)
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.
■ Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper
operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
122
Front Wiper Position
Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent)
Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 , then remove
the obstacle.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal
within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to
normal.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
123 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w , you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Control Knob
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
display.
(SEL/RESET) knob switches the
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.
Controls
You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.
1Brightness Control
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.
123
CR-V-31T0A600.book
124 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w .
Models with heating and cooling system
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 20 minutes.
However, if the outside temperature is -8°C or
below, they do not automatically switch off.
Controls
Models with climate control system
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 0°C or
below, they do not automatically switch off.
124
* Not available on all models
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
125 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluECON Button
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel
economy by adjusting the performance of the
engine, transmission, air conditioning system,
and cruise control.
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
To adjust
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
To lock
Lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
125
CR-V-31T0A600.book
126 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab
Up
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 128
Controls
Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position
■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
button to turn this function on and off. When
activated, the auto indicator comes on.
Indicator
126
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Sensor
Auto Button
* Not available on all models
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .
CR-V-31T0A600.book
127 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w .
Adjustment
Switch
Selector
Switch
■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Inner Segment
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Controls
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appears smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Outer Segment
127
CR-V-31T0A600.book
128 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.
Move back.
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seat *
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Height Adjustment
Lumbar Support
Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Driver side only
128
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
129 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Driver’s seat is shown.
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Continued
129
CR-V-31T0A600.book
130 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
Controls
130
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
131 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
Continued
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
For a head restraint system to work properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
Controls
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
3 WARNING
131
CR-V-31T0A600.book
132 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position
Controls
A passenger sitting in a center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Front and rear center headrestraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove the head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall the head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
132
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
133 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Folding Down the Rear Outer Head Restraint
Strap
A passenger in an outer back seating position
should use the upright head restraint before
the vehicle begins moving.
Continued
Controls
To fold down the head restraint:
Pull the strap.
To put the head restraint back in the
upright position:
Pull up the head restraint and push rearward
until it latches.
133
CR-V-31T0A600.book
134 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Controls
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
134
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
135 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for
cargo.
■ To fold down the seat
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling.
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into
the seat-back.
When you fold down one side of the rear seats and
use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make
sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward
and cause injury if you have to brake hard.
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.
Controls
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 36
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
From the rear door side
4. Pull the release strap.
Pull
From the cargo area side
Lever
4. Pull the release lever.
Continued
135
CR-V-31T0A600.book
136 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
■ To return the seat to the original
position
1. Pull up the seat-back in the upright
position.
Controls
2. Pull up the seat cushion in the original
position.
3. Put back the head restraints in the original
position.
■ Rear Seat-back Adjusting
Pull the lever on the right to change the angle
of the right half of the seat-back, and left for
the left half.
136
1To return the seat to the original position
Make sure the seat is latched before driving.
If the seat-back is not completely lowered, it does not
securely latch when returned to the upright position.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
137 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest *
Pull down the armrest.
Controls
■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
* Not available on all models
137
CR-V-31T0A600.book
138 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
■ ON
Front
Off
Door Activated Position
Controls
Rear and Cargo Area
On
Off
Door Activated Position
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Only the cargo area light comes on when the
tailgate is opened.
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with multi-information display
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 86
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.
1Map Lights
When the interior light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
138
CR-V-31T0A600.book
139 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box
1Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the master key.
To Lock
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
Controls
■ Console Compartment
Slide the lid using the release knob to open or
close the console compartment.
Continued
139
CR-V-31T0A600.book
140 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Controls
■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
140
CR-V-31T0A600.book
141 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w .
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120
watts or less (10 amps).
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment) *
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Controls
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
Models with rear accessory power socket
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
120 watts (10 amps).
141
CR-V-31T0A600.book
142 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
Controls
■ Cargo Side Net
Use the cargo side net to secure items to the
side.
142
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
143 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Cargo Hooks
Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
Use floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the
cargo area.
Hooks
Controls
There are also hooks on both sides of the
cargo area.
NOTICE
Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs
more than 6lbs (3kg) on the side cargo hooks.
Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the
hooks.
Hook
Continued
143
CR-V-31T0A600.book
144 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
Push
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
Controls
■ Conversation mirror
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror.
Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it
back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.
144
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
145 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Seat Heaters *
1Seat Heaters *
The ignition switch must be in ON (w to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the passenger's seatback due to the side airbag cutoff system.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Controls
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
3 WARNING
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
145
CR-V-31T0A600.book
146 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Tonneau Cover *
1Tonneau Cover *
The tonneau cover can be used to conceal
your parcels and protect them from direct
sunlight.
■ To extend:
Handle
Controls
Mounting Rod
Pull the handle on the center edge, then clip
the mounting rods in the hooks on both sides
of the hatch opening.
■ To retract:
Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll
it back until it is completely retracted.
Hook
■ To remove:
Push either end of the housing inward, then
lift it out of its position.
146
* Not available on all models
Do not access parcels in the cargo area while driving.
This may cause injury if you have to brake hard.
Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat
in the cargo area. They could block your view and be
thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.
To prevent tonneau cover damage:
• Do not place items on the tonneau cover.
• Do not put weight on the tonneau cover.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
147 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ To store:
The housing unit can be stored on the cargo
area floor to make more space available.
Push one end of the unit into the hole on one
side panel, then insert the other end into the
hole on the other side.
Controls
After storing the unit, rock it up and down to
make sure it is securely placed.
147
CR-V-31T0A600.book
148 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Heating and Cooling System *
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Buttons
Windshield Defroster Button
Change airflow.
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from
the defroster vents at the base of the
windshield, and switches the mode to
fresh air.
Controls
Floor and defroster vents
Floor vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed.
Rotate the dial all the
way to OFF to turn
everything off.
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the dashboard vents, and
switches the mode to recirculation.
A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or
dehumidify while heating.
Temperature
Control Dial
Adjusts the interior
temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the
button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
148
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
149 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
■ Heating
1Heating
■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select
.
3. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
4. Press the
button (the indicator on).
When you select
, the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Controls
The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the
button (the indicator off).
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
3. Select
.
4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial.
Continued
149
CR-V-31T0A600.book
150 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
■ Cooling
1To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Pressing the
button bypasses the ECON mode
control, and cools down the interior more rapidly.
Controls
■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the
button (the indicator on).
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the
button.
3. Press the
button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum heat.
150
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
151 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Dashboard vents Dashboard and
floor vents
Floor vents
Floor and
defroster vents
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
Driver's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
/
(Fan Control) Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side control
dial.
3. Press the
button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on) : Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
* Not available on all models
Continued
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in AUTO, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
Once you have set the desired temperature, do not
use the temperature control switches more than
necessary.
Doing so may delay the time it takes to reach the set
temperature.
Controls
AUTO Button
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
151
CR-V-31T0A600.book
152 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Pressing the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
Controls
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the
1To rapidly defrost the windows
button.
button.
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
152
CR-V-31T0A600.book
153 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuClimate Control System * uSynchronized Mode
Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
153
CR-V-31T0A600.book
154 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with a sunlight sensor, an interior
temperature and humidity sensor. Do not
cover or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor
Controls
154
Temperature and
Humidity Sensor
CR-V-31T0A600.book
155 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features on models without the navigation system.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 156
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 157
Auxiliary Input Jack * ........................ 157
Audio Antenna ................................ 158
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 158
Models without multi-information display
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 159
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 160
Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 161
Playing a CD .................................... 163
Playing an iPod®............................... 167
* Not available on all models
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 170
Models with multi-information display
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 173
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 174
Playing the AM/FM Radio................. 175
Playing the XM® Radio * ................... 178
Playing a CD .................................... 180
Playing an iPod®............................... 183
Playing Pandora® ............................. 186
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 188
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 191
Rear Entertainment System * ........... 193
Audio Error Messages ...................... 205
Audio Remote Controls.................... 209
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 210
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Using HFL ........................................ 214
HFL Menus ...................................... 216
Compass * .......................................... 243
155
CR-V-31T0A600.book
156 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Audio System
About Your Audio System
On models with navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual for operation
of the audio system, Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these
features.
Models without multi-information display
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, iPods®, and USB flash drives. You can operate the audio system from the
buttons and switches on the panel, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.
Features
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.
iPod®
156
* Not available on all models
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Models with multi-information display
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio * service. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, iPods®, iPhone®, USB flash drives, and Bluetooth®
devices.
Remote Control
1About Your Audio System
USB Flash
Drive
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® is a registered trademark owned by Apple Inc.
MP3 and AAC are standard audio compression
formats. WMA is an audio compression format
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
157 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the
adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB connector.
1USB Adapter Cable
• Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
•
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.
Features
Auxiliary Input Jack *
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
1Auxiliary Input Jack *
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
* Not available on all models
157
CR-V-31T0A600.book
158 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio SystemuAudio Antenna
Audio Antenna
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable
antenna at the rear of the roof.
1Audio Antenna
NOTICE
Before using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash, remove the
antenna by unscrewing it by hand. This prevents the
antenna from being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
Audio System Theft Protection
Features
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w , and turn on the audio system.
u If you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q , you will be requested to
enter the audio security code. See step 3.
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio
display */multi-information display *.
3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code
correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit
a dealer to have the system reset.
158
* Not available on all models
1Audio System Theft Protection
Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
U.S. models
You can register the security code at Owner Link
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
159 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Audio System Basic Operation
Models without multi-information display
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w .
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
SETUP
access some audio functions.
Button
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Button
Selector
Knob
Selector knob can be scrolled
to the direction(s).
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as the Auto Select (A.SEL), Radio Data System
(RDS), Play Mode, Adjust Clock, or the Title
Display.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press
to select.
to enter.
Press the SOURCE, (+ , (- ,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 209
SETUP Menu Items
2 Auto Select (A.SEL) P. 162
2 Radio Data System (RDS) P. 162
2 Play Mode P. 165
2 Adjust Clock P. 98
Features
Menu Display
1Audio System Basic Operation
159
CR-V-31T0A600.book
160 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
Press the
the setting.
button, and rotate
Each time you press the
mode switches as follows.
Button
to adjust
When the adjustment level reaches the center, you
will see C in the display.
button, a sound
Selector
Knob
Features
BASS is selectable.
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
160
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
161 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Playing the AM/FM Radio
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
FM Button
AM Button
Press to select a band.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
Features
/
Buttons
Press to display and select an
RDS category.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
SETUP Button
Press to select Auto Select (A.SEL) or
Radio Data System (RDS).
Continued
161
CR-V-31T0A600.book
162 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
■ Auto Select (A.SEL)
1Playing the AM/FM Radio
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in
each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Press
to enter the auto select mode.
u The system goes into scan mode for several seconds.
To turn off auto select, press
again. This restores the presets you originally set.
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■ RDS INFO ON
Press the SETUP button twice then press
while listening to an RDS capable
station. The station name is displayed. To turn off the RDS information, press
again.
■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the
/
button to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
RDS Category
162
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 209
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.
A.SEL function scans and stores up to six AM stations
and twelve FM stations with a strong signal into the
preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
The display shows up to 16 characters of text data.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
163 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
/
Buttons
Press to change folders (MP3
or WMA).
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
Features
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all tracks
on the CD (all files in the
current folder in MP3 or
WMA).
● Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders (MP3 or
WMA).
● To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to change tracks/
files or select an item, then press
to set your selection.
SETUP Button
Press to select Play Mode or Title
Display.
Continued
163
CR-V-31T0A600.book
164 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
NOTICE
1. Press
Folder
Selection
to switch the display to a folder list.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE, then skips
to the next file.
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
Features
Track Selection
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
164
1Playing a CD
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
The display shows up to 16 characters of text data.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
165 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the
button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button twice to cancel
this setting mode.
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
.
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press
to select a mode, then press
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
RPT ONE TRK: Repeats the current track/file(s).
RPT ONE FLD MP3/WMA : Repeats all files in the
current folder.
RDM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
RDM IN FLD MP3/WMA : Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
.
Continued
165
CR-V-31T0A600.book
166 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a Title Display
You can select an item to be shown on the display if the CD was recorded with text
data.
1. Press the SETUP button twice.
2. Rotate
to select a title display mode,
Title Display Mode
then press .
Features
166
1How to Select a Title Display
Press the
button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
Title Display Mode Menu Items
NORMAL: Track number
MP3/WMA : File number and folder number
FOLDER MP3/WMA : Folder name
FILE MP3/WMA : File name
ALBUM: Album name
TRACK: Track name
ARTIST: Artist name
CR-V-31T0A600.book
167 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
/
Buttons
Press
to go back to the
previous display.
Press
to set your selection.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Features
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change
songs.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Continued
167
CR-V-31T0A600.book
168 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
■ How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press
to display the iPod® menu.
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
iPod® Menu
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
Features
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
168
CR-V-31T0A600.book
169 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode.
SHUFFLE: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
SHUFFLE ALBUMS: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode.
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track.
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press
.
169
CR-V-31T0A600.book
170 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
/
Buttons
Press
to skip to the next
folder, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
Features
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each file.
● Press to sample all files in
the current folder.
● Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders.
● To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
170
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
171 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
Folder Selection
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
Continued
Features
Track Selection
171
CR-V-31T0A600.book
172 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
NORMAL PLAY
REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file.
REPEAT ONE FOLDER: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
RANDOM IN FOLDER: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order.
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select NORMAL PLAY, then press
172
.
.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
173 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Audio System Basic Operation
Models with multi-information display
1Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w .
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
SETUP
access some audio functions.
Button
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Button
Selector
Knob
* Not available on all models
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as the Auto Select, RDS Information, Sound
Settings, Play Mode, Resume/Pause *, or Adjust
Clock.
button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Rotate
Press
to select.
to enter.
Press the SOURCE, (+ , (- ,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 209
SETUP Menu Items
2 Auto Select P. 176
2 RDS information P. 177
2 Sound Settings P. 174
2 Play Mode P. 182
2 Resume/Pause P. 192
2 Adjust Clock P. 98
Features
Menu Display
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
173
CR-V-31T0A600.book
174 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
SETUP
Button
Press the SETUP button, and rotate
to
select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
Selector
Knob
Features
Subwoofer *
TREBLE is selectable.
174
* Not available on all models
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and
HIGH.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
175 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Playing the AM/FM Radio
/
Buttons
Press to display and select an
RDS category.
AM Button
FM Button
Press to select a band.
*
FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press to search up and down
the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
* Not available on all models
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a
band, then press the preset button.
Features
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the
strongest stations on the
selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, press the
button again.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Continued
175
CR-V-31T0A600.book
176 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
■ Auto Select
1Playing the AM/FM Radio
Use the auto select feature to scan both bands and store the strongest station in
each preset.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Auto Select, then press
.
To turn off auto select, press
again. This
restores the presets you originally set.
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 209
You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations
into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store six stations each.
Features
Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM
stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal
into the preset button memory.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
176
CR-V-31T0A600.book
177 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■ RDS information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate
to
select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS
Information switches between on and off.
RDS Category
Features
■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
1. Press the
/
button to display and
select an RDS category.
2. Use SEEK/SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS
station.
177
CR-V-31T0A600.book
178 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio *
Playing the XM® Radio *
/
Buttons
Press
to skip to the next
category, and
to skip to
the previous category.
Features
178
SCAN Button
Press to sample all channels (in the
channel mode), or channels within a
category (in the category mode).
Each sampling continues for a few
seconds. Press SCAN again to cancel
scanning and continue listening to
the channel.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it
until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored channel, select
XM, then press the preset button.
(XM®) Button
Press to select XM® Radio.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select channels.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to previous or
next channel.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
179 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the XM® Radio *
■ To Play the XM® Radio
1Playing the XM® Radio *
1. Press the
button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press the SETUP button, rotate
to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE
CHANNEL. Each time you press , the mode switches between them. Press the
button to enter the setting.
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP,
/ , SCAN, or Preset buttons.
■ To Select a Channel from a List
* Not available on all models
You can store twelve XM® stations in the preset
buttons. XM1 and XM2 let you store six stations
each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
Features
1. Press
to display a channel list.
2. Rotate
to select a channel, then press
.
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
179
CR-V-31T0A600.book
180 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA
format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Features
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all tracks
on the CD (all files in the
current folder in MP3 or
WMA).
● Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders (MP3 or
WMA).
● To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
/
Buttons
Press
to skip to the next
folder, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder in MP3 or WMA.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change
tracks (files in MP3 or WMA).
180
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
181 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
1. Press
to switch the display to a folder list.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unsupported, then skips
to the next file.
Folder Selection
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Features
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
Track Selection
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
Continued
181
CR-V-31T0A600.book
182 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Press the
button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
Repeat One Folder MP3/WMA : Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Random in Folder MP3/WMA : Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
Features
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
182
.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
183 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Playing an iPod®
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
Album Art
Features
/
Buttons
Press
to go back to the
previous display.
Press
to set your selection.
USB Indicator
Comes on when an iPod® is
connected.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Continued
183
CR-V-31T0A600.book
184 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
■ How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu
1. Press
to display the iPod® menu.
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
Features
iPod® Menu
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
184
CR-V-31T0A600.book
185 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode.
Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
Features
Play Mode
Items
.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
Continued
185
CR-V-31T0A600.book
186 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
U.S. models
iPhone® use only
Playing Pandora®
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone® using your dock connector to the USB
adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
Rating Icon
Album Art
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
/
Buttons
to the next
Press
station.
Press
to the previous
station.
Selector Knob
Press to enter PANDORA MENU.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select iPhone® (if connected
when the Pandora® application is
activated).
SKIP Button
Press
to skip a song.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
186
CR-V-31T0A600.book
187 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®
■ Pandora® Menu
1Playing Pandora®
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Station List (QuickMix is also available)
• Like
• Dislike
• Resume/Pause
• SKIP
• Bookmark this song
• Bookmark this artist
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your iPhone®. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
1. Press
to display the PANDORA MENU.
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
Features
■ Operating a menu item
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2 Pandora® P. 207
You can skip the song or select Dislike only a
predetermined number of times in an hour.
187
CR-V-31T0A600.book
188 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 157
USB Indicator
Comes on when a USB flash drive
is connected.
Features
/
Buttons
Press
to skip to the next
folder, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second
sampling of each file.
● Press to sample all files in
the current folder.
● Press two times to sample
the first file in each of the
main folders.
● To turn off scan, press and
hold the button.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.
188
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
189 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 210
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
Track Selection
2. Rotate
Features
Folder Selection
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the multi-information display.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 206
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
Continued
189
CR-V-31T0A600.book
190 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Features
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
190
.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
191 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Models with Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 221
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when
your phone is
connected to HFL.
Preset 1 Button
Press to switch the
mode between
pause and resume.
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to
change files.
Selector Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Press to display the
device’s name.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
You can find an approved phone by visiting
www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or by calling the
HandsFreeLink® consumer support at (888) 528 7876. In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
(888) 528 -7876.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
SETUP Button
Press to display
menu items.
Continued
191
CR-V-31T0A600.book
192 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
linked to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Features
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
■ To pause or resume a file
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
1Switching to HFL
■ Switching to HFL
Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 214
Button
Button
192
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
* Not available on all models
Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
193 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Rear Entertainment System *
Optional for U.S.
1Rear Entertainment System *
Allows the rear passengers to enjoy a different entertainment source, such as DVD
and CD, than the front passengers.
■ Wireless Headphone
The rear seat passengers can listen to audio from the rear entertainment system by
a wireless headphone that comes with your vehicle.
To turn on the switch: Pivot the left
earpiece outward.
To adjust the volume: Turn the dial at the
bottom of the right earpiece.
V
L
R
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Features
If you want to listen to the audio from the rear
entertainment system on the speakers, press
the AUX button and change to the AUX
mode.
NOTICE
This vehicle’s overhead mounted video display, if so
equipped, includes mercury-containing components.
Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as
hazardous waste.
The system also allows for auxiliary inputs from
standard video games. The jacks are in the console
compartment.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
1Wireless Headphone
Wear the headphone correctly with the earpiece
marked with L goes to your left ear and R goes to
your right ear. Wearing the headphone backward
may affect the audio reception.
* Not available on all models
Continued
193
CR-V-31T0A600.book
194 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ Overhead Screen
1Overhead Screen
Pull down the screen to the first or second
detent until it latches.
Overhead
Screen
Open
Button
Features
194
Operating the System
To operate the system, turn the ignition switch to ON (w or ACCESSORY (q . Press
the REAR POWER button to turn on the system (the indicator on).
NOTICE
This vehicle's overhead mounted video display, if so
equipped, includes mercury-containing components.
Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as
hazardous waste.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
195 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ Control Panel in the Console Compartment
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the CD/DVD.
Press again to resume.
REAR POWER Button
Press to turn the rear
entertainment system on and
off.
SOURCE Button
Press to change the source DVD or
AUX. The indicator comes on for
the selected source.
AUX VIDEO Jack
You can connect other audio or
videos.
Features
(CD/DVD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD/DVD.
REAR CTRL OFF Button
Press to cancel the operation from
the rear seat.
CD/DVD Slot
Continued
195
CR-V-31T0A600.book
196 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ System Controls and Menus for DVD
(Power) Button
Press to turn on the system.
DVD Button
Press to
watch a DVD.
TITLE Button
Press to display the status of the
DVD that is currently playing.
The following options appear when you play a
DVD and press the MENU button.
Use , , , or
to highlight
a menu item, and press the ENT
button to make a selection.
Menu
Audio
Play Mode
Subtitle
Features
CANCEL Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or operation.
SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change
chapters.
Top Menu
MENU Button
SETUP Button
Fast-forward Button
Press and hold to fast forward to
chapters.
Title
Chapter
Repeat
OFF
Chapter
Return
Title
Brightness
Rewind Button
Press and hold to reverse to
chapters.
Stop Button
Press to stop a DVD.
Angle
Search
NumInput
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the DVD. Press
to again resume.
196
AUX Button
Press to access AUX mode.
Disp Adjust
Contrast
Black Level
Aspect Ratio
The following options
appear when you play a
DVD and press the SETUP
button:
Tint
Color
Reset
Language
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
CR-V-31T0A600.book
197 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ Playing a DVD
• Insert a DVD into the slot in the console compartment.
u The system automatically starts the DVD.
• To fast forward, press and hold the fast-forward button, and to rewind, press and
hold the rewind button on the remote.
• To go to the next chapter, press the
(SKIP) button, and to go to the beginning
of the current chapter, press the
button on the remote. Quickly press the
button twice to go to the previous chapter.
■ TITLE button on the remote
Press the TITLE button while the DVD is playing to see the current status of title,
chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio, and sound characteristics.
Press the MENU button while the DVD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and
buttons to highlight the option and
then press the ENT button.
Continued
DVD is available for the rear seat passengers only.
1TITLE button on the remote
Press the TITLE button again to return.
Features
■ MENU button on the remote
1Playing a DVD
197
CR-V-31T0A600.book
198 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
Top Menu:
The top page of the DVD’s title menu appears. The title menu also appears when
you press the MENU button while the DVD is in the slot not playing. Press the
CANCEL or MENU button to return.
Menu:
The DVD’s title menu appears.
Features
198
Play Mode:
You can change the following three settings:
Audio - Select a language for audio that is available on the DVD. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio, etc) of that audio is also
displayed.
Subtitle - Select a subtitle that is available on the DVD.
Angle - Select a view angle that is available on the DVD. If the DVD currently playing
does not carry multiple angles, only one option Angle 1 comes on. Press the
CANCEL or MENU button to return.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
199 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
Search:
You can search for a DVD segment from the following methods.
Title Search - Select the title you want to play.
Chapter Search - Select the chapter you want to play.
Repeat:
Highlight this option and press the ENT button to change the repeat mode from
chapter repeat and title repeat, to repeat off.
Continued
Features
NumInput:
Enter a two digit number, if issued to the DVD, to find the segment you want to start
to play.
1. Select NumInput to go to the number input screen.
2. Use the , , , and
buttons to input numbers.
u If you want to delete a number, select DEL.
3. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input two digits. Press the ENT
button to enter.
199
CR-V-31T0A600.book
200 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ SETUP button on the remote
1SETUP button on the remote
Press the SETUP button while the DVD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and
buttons to highlight the option and
then press ENT.
Features
Disp Adjust:
You can adjust the overhead screen’s Brightness, Contrast, Black Level, Color,
and Tint. To return to the default display setting, select Reset.
After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen,
or press the CANCEL button to return.
Aspect Ratio:
You can select the screen mode with a different aspect ratio from Normal, Wide,
Zoom, and Full. After you select the mode, it takes about one second to return to
the play mode with the selected ratio.
Language:
You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.
200
Some DVD formats do not allow for some of the
setting adjustments.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
201 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
When the DVD is not playing
1SETUP button on the remote
Initial Settings Press the SETUP button to configure the initial Language, Dynamic Range, and
Angle Mark settings before playing a DVD.
Features
Language Settings:
Select the language for the DVD’s displayed menus (Menu Language), the DVD’s
audio (Audio Language), and the DVD’s subtitle (Subtitle Language).
1. Select the language setting.
2. Select the language from English, French, Spanish, Arabic, German, Italian,
Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai, Japanese, and other.
3. If you select other, you need to enter the four digit language code to configure
the language that is not listed. Select Yes to go to the number input screen.
u To return to the Language Settings screen, select No.
4. Press the ENT button each time you input a digit.
u If you want to delete a number, select DEL.
5. The cursor automatically goes to ENT after you input four digits. Press the ENT
button to command.
Initial Settings:
The prior language varies by disc. You may not be
able to configure your selected language setting.
Dynamic Range:
This feature reduces the difference between the loud and quiet sound levels. Select
ON or OFF.
Angle Mark:
You can select whether to display the angle mark appearing in the upper right
corner of the screen when you change the view angle while the DVD is playing.
Select ON or OFF.
Continued
201
CR-V-31T0A600.book
202 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ System Controls and Menus for CD
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system ON and OFF.
DVD Button
Press to listen
to a CD.
TITLE Button
Press to scroll titles on CD.
Features
Use
,
,
, or
to
highlight a menu item, and
press the ENT button to make
a selection.
SETUP Button
CANCEL Button
Press to go back to the
previous operation.
SKIP Buttons
Press
or
to change tracks.
Play/Pause Button
Press to pause the CD. Press to
again resume.
Rewind Button
Press and hold to reverse to
track.
202
The following options
appear when you play
a CD and press the
SETUP button:
Brightness
Disp Adjust
Contrast
Black Level
Reset
Blue
Black
Appearance
White
Brown
Fast-forward Button
Press and hold to fast
forward to track.
Red
Language
CR-V-31T0A600.book
203 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uOperating the System
■ Playing a CD
Press the DVD button.
The available options appear on the overhead screen are Repeat, Random, and Scan.
These functions are the same as those of the playing a DVD.
2 Playing a DVD P. 197
1System Controls and Menus for CD
You can also insert an audio CD compatible with the
system, or recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC formats into
the slot and play.
2 Playable Discs P. 204
To scroll your audio data title, press the TITLE button for five seconds.
■ SETUP button on the remote
Features
Press the SETUP button while the CD is
playing to see the available options. Use the
and
buttons to highlight the option and
then press ENT.
Disp Adjust:
You can adjust the overhead screen’s Brightness, Contrast, and Black Level. To
return to the default display setting, select Reset.
After you make all the adjustments, the screen goes back to the top SETUP screen,
or press the CANCEL button to return.
Appearance:
You can select the screen color from blue, black, white, brown, and red.
Language:
You can select the display language from English, French, and Spanish.
203
CR-V-31T0A600.book
204 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRear Entertainment System * uPlayable Discs
Playable Discs
The discs that come with these labels can be
played in your vehicle’s rear entertainment
system.
Also look for the region code of 1 or ALL on
the package or jacket on the disc.
DVD-ROMs are not playable in this unit.
However, the audio data, such as MP3, WMA
and AAC music files, on a DVD-ROMs can be
played.
Features
204
1Playable Discs
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
205 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Cause
HEAT ERROR
High temperature
UNPLAYABLE/ Unsupported
Track/file format not supported
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
Mechanical error
Solution
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
●
Press the
(eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
●
MECH ERROR
2 Protecting CDs P. 212
●
●
BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL
Servo error
CHECK DISC
Disc error
●
●
If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Features
●
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 212
205
CR-V-31T0A600.book
206 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
iPod®/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Features
206
Solution
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device Please
Check Owners Manual.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No Song
Appears when the iPod® is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Ver
Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Retry Connection
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
207 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
U.S. models
Models with multi-information display
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
PANDORA No Station
Solution
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Unsupported Ver. Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.
Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.
PANDORA Check Device
Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
Pandora Loading
Appears when Pandora is loading.
Features
PANDORA No Service
207
CR-V-31T0A600.book
208 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuDVD Player Error Messages
Models with rear entertainment system
DVD Player Error Messages
Error Message
Features
208
Cause
Solution
Disc Error
FOCUS Error
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc. Check for an error indication.
Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear or the disc cannot be
removed, consult a dealer.
MECH Error
Mechanical Error
Region Error
Invalid region code
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc compatible
with this system.
Heat Error
High temperature
Turn the system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message
is cleared.
Format Error
Track/file format not
supported
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays
automatically.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
209 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM XM1 * XM2 * CD AUX
Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in the AUX mode, the following are operable
from the remote controls:
• iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB
adapter cable
• Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
Features
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : Increases the volume.
Press (- : Decreases the volume.
1Audio Remote Controls
Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : Selects the next preset radio station.
Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press and hold : Selects the previous station.
Press and hold : Selects the next station.
* Not available on all models
209
CR-V-31T0A600.book
210 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
General Information on the Audio System
XM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.
■ Receiving XM® Radio
Press the
(XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Features
210
■ XM® Radio Display Messages
LOADING:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
OFF AIR:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
UPDATING:
The encryption code is being updated. Channels 0 and 1 still work normally.
NO SIGNAL:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
--------:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
ANTENNA:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 8529696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877)
209-0079
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
CR-V-31T0A600.book
211 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
■ CDs with MP3 or WMA files
Features
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3 or WMA formats may be unsupported.
Continued
211
CR-V-31T0A600.book
212 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
Features
●
●
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
212
With Label/
Sticker
Warped
Burrs
CR-V-31T0A600.book
213 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod® Model Compatibility
Model
iPod classic ® 80GB/160GB
iPod classic ® 120GB
iPod classic ® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod ® (5th generation)
iPod nano ®
iPod touch ®
iPhone ® 3GS
iPhone ® 4
•
•
•
•
•
Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
Features
■ USB Flash Drives
1iPod® Model Compatibility
213
CR-V-31T0A600.book
214 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Models with navigation system
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
For models with the navigation system, see Navigation System Manual for how to
operate the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
■ HFL Buttons
Features
Volume up
Pick-up
Button
Microphone
Volume
down
Selector
Knob
Hang-up/Back Button
TALK Button
PHONE
Button
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(TALK) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .
214
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)
528 -7876.
* Not available on all models
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
215 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uUsing HFL
■ HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
The multi-information display notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Roam Status
Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Bluetooth® name and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
The information that appears on the multiinformation display varies between phone models.
Call Name
■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Features
1HFL Status Display
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 86
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You
cannot select a grayed-out option until the
vehicle is stopped.
Disabled Option
* Not available on all models
Only previously stored speed dial entries can
be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 231
215
CR-V-31T0A600.book
216 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
PHONE or
Phone
Speed Dial
*1
*1
Call History
Features
*1
Phonebook
*1
Dial
Display your speed dial entry lists.
(up to 15 entries per paired phone)
Dialed Calls
Display the last 20
outgoing calls.
Received Calls
Display the last 20
incoming calls.
Missed Calls
Display the last 20
missed calls.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
216
1HFL Menus
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
217 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
*1
Redial
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Select message and
Text Message
.
Message is read
aloud
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
Reply
Reply to a received message using one
of six fixed phrases.
Call
Make a call to the sender.
Display Message
See an entire received message (if more
than three lines of text).
Features
Read/Stop reading
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
217
CR-V-31T0A600.book
218 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
Phone Setup
Features
218
Connection
Add a New Phone
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a Phone
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect Phone
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a Phone
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pairing Code
Create a code for a paired phone.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
219 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
Add New
*1
Speed Dial
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Change Speed Dial
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Delete Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Features
Existing entry list
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
219
CR-V-31T0A600.book
220 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter
the vehicle.
Caller ID Info
Features
*1
Passcode
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
220
Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.
Number Priority
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Text Message Notice
System Clear
Name Priority
Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security
codes.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
221 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
5. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Continued
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Your phone must be in the discoverable or search
mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your
phone's manual.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Features
3. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
221
CR-V-31T0A600.book
222 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
Features
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Add a New Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to Select Location.
5. Rotate
222
to select Empty, then press
.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
223 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
Features
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Continued
223
CR-V-31T0A600.book
224 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is “0000” until you change
the setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Features
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Pairing Code, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random, then
press .
224
CR-V-31T0A600.book
225 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Connection, then Delete a Phone.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
u You will receive a notification on the
screen if it is successful.
Continued
225
CR-V-31T0A600.book
226 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
Features
3. Rotate
to select Text Message Notice,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .
226
1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
227 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Passcode.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
PIN to.
u Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen.
u Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
In the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate
to select, then press . Press
to delete. Press
to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
2.
Continued
227
CR-V-31T0A600.book
228 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
Features
■ Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Caller ID
Info.
3. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
228
1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller’s name is displayed if it
is stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority mode: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
229 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To Clear the System
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
5. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate
to finish.
Continued
229
CR-V-31T0A600.book
230 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Features
Pref
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Message
Work
Other
Pager
Voice
If a name has four or more numbers, “∙∙∙“ appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
230
CR-V-31T0A600.book
231 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
Continued
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
Features
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial, then Add New.
3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
By Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
By Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
231
CR-V-31T0A600.book
232 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
232
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
CR-V-31T0A600.book
233 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
1Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and wait for a beep before
giving a command.
Features
■ Making a Call
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Continued
233
CR-V-31T0A600.book
234 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using the imported
Features
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then press
.
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate
to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
234
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 215
2 Speed Dial P. 231
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 215
2 Speed Dial P. 231
CR-V-31T0A600.book
235 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
Features
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 231
235
CR-V-31T0A600.book
236 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller Name
1Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the
Press the
Features
236
button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.
Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
237 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
PHONE button.
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
Features
2. Rotate
to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Continued
237
CR-V-31T0A600.book
238 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Receiving a Text Message
Features
238
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate
to select Yes to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
the
button.
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
Only the most recent 20 text messages are displayed.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 242
CR-V-31T0A600.book
239 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
The
icon appears next to an unread message.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 242
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
Continued
Features
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
239
CR-V-31T0A600.book
240 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Using the stop reading or read option
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Stop Reading or Read,
then press .
Features
240
1Using the stop reading or read option
This option changes to:
• Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message readout.
• Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option
to hear the system reading out the selected
message.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
241 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
Continued
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I'm driving.
• I am on my way.
• I'm running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
After you reply, the following is displayed:
Features
■ Reply to a message
You can reply to a message using one of the
six common phrases available in the system.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed.
Select Yes to send the message.
241
CR-V-31T0A600.book
242 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus
■ Making a call to a sender
Features
242
You can call the text message sender.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Call, then press .
u HFL begins dialing.
■ Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Display Message,
then press .
6. Rotate
to scroll down and display the
entire message.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
243 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Compass *
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the
display shows the compass setting menu.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then press
.
1Compass *
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
Compass Setting Menu Items
Features
While setting the compass:
• The
button returns to the previous screen.
• The SETUP button cancels the setting mode.
4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
* Not available on all models
243
CR-V-31T0A600.book
244 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection
Compass Zone Selection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until the
display shows the compass setting menu.
3. Rotate
to select Zone, then press .
The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
Zone Number
Zone Map
Features
1
15
14
2
3
13
12
4
11
5
6
7
Guam Island : Zone 8
Puerto Rico : Zone 11
244
8
9
10
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
245 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 246
Maximum Load Limit........................ 249
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 251
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 254
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 255
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information......................... 257
Important Safety Precautions............ 257
Avoiding Trouble ............................. 258
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 259
Precautions While Driving................. 261
* Not available on all models
Automatic Transmission ................... 262
Shifting............................................ 263
Cruise Control ................................. 265
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 268
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™ * ......................................... 270
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 270
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 271
Braking
Brake System ................................... 273
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 275
Brake Assist System ......................... 276
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 277
Parking ............................................ 277
Multi-View Rear Camera * ................ 278
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 279
How to Refuel ................................. 280
Fuel Economy.................................... 282
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 282
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 283
Modifications................................... 283
245
CR-V-31T0A600.book
246 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving
246
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
247 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
■ Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 249
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 104
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
Driving
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 128
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 131
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 125
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 126
Continued
247
CR-V-31T0A600.book
248 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 34
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 70
Driving
248
CR-V-31T0A600.book
249 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Label Example
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
Continued
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 364
Driving
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 364
249
CR-V-31T0A600.book
250 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
Example2
250
CR-V-31T0A600.book
251 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
■ Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load
Continued
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).
Driving
Tongue Load
Load
Tongue
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 364
251
CR-V-31T0A600.book
252 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■ Trailer brakes
Driving
Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more:
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
252
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
253 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
■ Trailer light
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Small (Red)
Backup Light (Brown)
Left Turn Signal (Violet)
Brake Light (Pink)
Right Turn Signal (Green)
Option (Yellow)
Grand (Black)
When using a non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, get the connector
and pins for your vehicle from a dealer.
Driving
Your trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.
Each pin’s purpose and wiring color code are shown in the image.
253
CR-V-31T0A600.book
254 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
Driving Safely with a Trailer
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 251
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
■ Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
■ Turning and Braking
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.
■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
heating and cooling system */climate control system * and reduce speed. Pull to the
side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
• Shift to the (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.
254
* Not available on all models
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
255 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.
1Towing Your Vehicle
NOTICE
■ When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
AWD models
To avoid damage to the AWD system, your vehicle
must be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if
any other items are recommended or required for
your towing situation.
If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the
transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Driving
Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle.
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
u Make sure the fluid level is between the upper and lower marks.
2. Start the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever through all its positions.
4. Shift to (D and hold for five seconds, then to (N . Let the engine run for three
minutes, then turn it off.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (q .
u Make sure the steering wheel does not lock.
7. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
u This can prevent the battery from running down.
Failure to follow the recommended instructions
exactly will result in severe automatic transmission
damage. If you cannot shift the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
1When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
NOTICE
Severe transmission damage will occur if the vehicle is
shifted from (R to (N and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
Continued
255
CR-V-31T0A600.book
256 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
■ Extended towing
If you tow more than 8 hours in one day, you should repeat the “before towing your
vehicle procedure” at least every 8 hours. You also need to perform the following
procedure to prevent the battery from running down.
1. Remove the 7.5 A accessory radio fuse and
Accessory Radio Fuse
7.5 A accessory key lock fuse. These fuses
are located in the interior fuse box.
2 Interior Fuse Box P. 358
Accessory Key Lock Fuse
Driving
256
2. Store the fuse in a safe place so you do not
lose it.
u Make sure to reinstall the fuse before
you start driving your vehicle.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
257 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 249
3 WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off
pavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers can be
seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 28
2 Precautions While Driving P. 261
Driving
• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
257
CR-V-31T0A600.book
258 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Avoiding Trouble
Driving
258
• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
• Driving on Slopes increasing your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the
safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before
you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find
another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back
down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
259 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
Brake Pedal
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
Driving
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system */climate control system *, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 112
* Not available on all models
Continued
259
CR-V-31T0A600.book
260 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
■ Starting to Drive
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 273
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist feature helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you
move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D or (d when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
Driving
260
The brakes remain engaged briefly as you release the brake pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
261 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving
■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
cause electrical component failure.
■ Other Precautions
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
Driving
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
1Precautions While Driving
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 28
2 Precautions While Driving P. 261
261
CR-V-31T0A600.book
262 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission
■ Creeping
The following conditions cause the engine to run at high revolutions, and increase
creeping:
• Immediately after the engine starts.
• When the heating and cooling system */climate control system * is in use.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Driving
262
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
263 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Release Button
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 5th automatically)
Driving
Second
Used to increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)
First
Used to further increase engine braking
(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)
(d Button
Drive (D3)
Press the (d button while the shift lever
is in (D .
Used when:
● Going up or down hills
● Towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Continued
263
CR-V-31T0A600.book
264 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
■ Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Tachometer's red zone
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Driving
Depress the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release button to
shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
264
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
265 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
In (D or (d
How to use
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
When to use
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
1Cruise Control
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
the steering wheel.
Continued
Driving
Cruise control is ready to use.
■ Press the CRUISE button on
265
CR-V-31T0A600.book
266 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button
On
On
On when cruise control begins
Press and release
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the
desired speed.
Driving
266
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
267 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
■ To Cancel
CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
1To Cancel
Driving
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
267
CR-V-31T0A600.book
268 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
Driving
268
VSA® System
Indicator
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
269 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
■ VSA® On and Off
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® OFF
Indicator
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.
(VSA® OFF)
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Driving
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure, or TPMS indicator comes on
or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the
button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
269
CR-V-31T0A600.book
270 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguREAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™ *
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™ *
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of
front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This
allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Driving
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle's tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on.
1REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control System™ *
NOTICE
Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 326
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On P. 356
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
270
* Not available on all models
CR-V-31T0A600.book
271 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Continued
271
CR-V-31T0A600.book
272 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale,
which displays the symbol “TPMS” when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
Driving
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
272
CR-V-31T0A600.book
273 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Depress the parking brake pedal down with
your foot.
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
To prevent the parking brake from freezing when the
outside temperature is extremely cold, do not apply
it, but do the following:
Put the shift lever in (P , then use a block or other
wheel chock to stop the wheels from turning.
To release:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Depress the parking brake.
Driving
Continued
273
CR-V-31T0A600.book
274 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps
reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very
hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 276
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 275
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Driving
274
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
275 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
"stomp and steer."
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.
Driving
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
275
CR-V-31T0A600.book
276 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Driving
276
CR-V-31T0A600.book
277 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if parked on an
incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D .
2. Apply the parking brake while holding the brake pedal down.
3. Move the shift lever to (P .
4. Turn off the engine.
1Parking
Driving
Parking
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
277
CR-V-31T0A600.book
278 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Multi-View Rear Camera *
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with navigation system
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
For models with the navigation system, see the Navigation System Manual.
Models without navigation system
The multi-information display can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Normal View Mode
Driving
Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Tailgate Open Range
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Top Down View Mode
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top view was last used, Wide mode is selected.
278
* Not available on all models
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt, moist, etc, use
a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of
debris.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
279 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
1Fuel Information
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
NOTICE
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Driving
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
"TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Continued
279
CR-V-31T0A600.book
280 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
■ Gasoline containing ethanol
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is
designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 15.3 US gal (58 liters)
1How to Refuel
How to Refuel
Driving
280
Pull
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
under the lower left corner of the
dashboard.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
281 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
Driving
Holder
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Cap
Cap
1How to Refuel
281
CR-V-31T0A600.book
282 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display/multi-information display *.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Driving
282
* Not available on all models
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
CR-V-31T0A600.book
283 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 357
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
Driving
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
283
CR-V-31T0A600.book
284
284 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
CR-V-31T0A600.book
285 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 286
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 287
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 288
Maintenance Minder™ .................... 289
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 297
Opening the Hood ........................... 298
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 299
Oil Check ......................................... 300
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 301
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 302
* Not available on all models
Engine Coolant ................................ 304
Transmission Fluid............................ 306
Brake Fluid....................................... 307
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 308
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 309
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 316
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 320
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 321
Tire Labeling .................................... 321
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......323
Wear Indicators................................ 325
Tire Service Life ................................ 325
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 326
Tire Rotation.................................... 327
Winter Tires ..................................... 328
Battery............................................... 329
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 330
Remote Control and Wireless
Headphone Care * ........................... 331
Heating and Cooling System */Climate
Control System * Maintenance....... 333
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 334
Exterior Care.................................... 336
285
CR-V-31T0A600.book
286 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level monthly.
2 Automatic Transmission Fluid P. 306
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 307
Maintenance
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 320
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 309
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 316
286
* Not available on all models
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are "certified" to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display/multiinformation display *.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 291, 295
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 373
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
287 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
■ Vehicle Safety
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
Maintenance
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
287
CR-V-31T0A600.book
288 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
Maintenance
288
CR-V-31T0A600.book
289 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Maintenance Minder™
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display or the multi-information display * every time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w . The messages notify you when to change the
engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance
services.
Models without multi-information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press the
(SEL/RESET) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
Maintenance
The Maintenance Minder indicator (
) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
289
CR-V-31T0A600.book
290 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display
(SEL/RESET) knob.
Explanation
Information
The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.
The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.
Maintenance Minder Indicator
Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts to The engine oil has almost reached It goes off when the display is
the end of its service life, and the switched.
appear along with the engine oil
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.
Maintenance
290
Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
291 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Minder Message
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
* Not available on all models
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
5
6
●
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid *
Maintenance
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Sub Items
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Continued
291
CR-V-31T0A600.book
292 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(SEL/RESET) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
Maintenance
292
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
293 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Models with multi-information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the Maintenance info screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press the MENU button to go to the Vehicle Menu screen.
3. Select Vehicle Information with the (+ button, then press the SOURCE button.
4. Press the SOURCE button again to go to the Maintenance info screen. The
engine oil life appears on the multi-information display.
Engine Oil Life
2345
50
Main
Item
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 295
SOURCE
Maintenance
Sub Item
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
SOURCE
Button
MENU
MENU
Button
Continued
293
CR-V-31T0A600.book
294 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Oil Life Display on the
Information Display
Oil Life Display
15 %
2345
15
Engine oil
Air filters
5%
2345
5
Engine oil
Air filters
Maintenance
-
294
Explanation
Information
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
The engine oil life indicator The engine oil is
starts to appear along with approaching the end of
its service life.
other due soon
maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
Starts to come on when
the remaining engine oil
life becomes 15 percent.
It goes off when the
display is switched.
The SERVICE message also
starts to appear along with
the engine oil life indicator
and the maintenance item
codes.
The engine oil has almost
reached the end of its
service life, and the
maintenance items
should be inspected and
serviced as soon as
possible.
The remaining engine oil
life has passed its service
life, and a negative distance
appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10
km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the
display blinks.
The engine oil life has
passed. The
maintenance items must
be inspected and
Stays on as a reminder
serviced immediately.
even when the display is
switched.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
295 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Minder
Message
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main
Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
* Not available on all models
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
5
6
●
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid *
Maintenance
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Sub Items
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you tow your vehicle behind a motorhome, the transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Continued
295
CR-V-31T0A600.book
296 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Engine
Oil Life
Maintenance Item Codes
SOURCE
Button
(- Button
Maintenance
296
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Go to the Maintenance info screen.
2 Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items P. 293
3. Press the SOURCE button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select Yes with the (- button, then press the SOURCE button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
u Any maintenance items that are necessary for your vehicle at the next
maintenance service will appear.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select No, then press the SOURCE button.
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
297 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Battery
Maintenance
Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Dipstick (Yellow Loop)
Radiator Cap
297
CR-V-31T0A600.book
298 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
Lever
Maintenance
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
298
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
299 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
299
CR-V-31T0A600.book
300 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Maintenance
300
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
301 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil
Fill Cap
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Maintenance
301
CR-V-31T0A600.book
302 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display/multi-information display *.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the bolts on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
Bolt
Under Cover
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt
Maintenance
302
Washer
* Not available on all models
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
303 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Oil Filter
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
303
CR-V-31T0A600.book
304 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
■ Reserve Tank
MAX
Maintenance
304
Reserve
Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
You will need a more concentrated coolant if you are
driving in extremely cold temperature below −31°F
(−35°C). Consult your Honda dealer for details about
a suitable coolant mixture.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
MIN
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
305 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
■ Radiator
1Radiator
Radiator Cap
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Maintenance
305
CR-V-31T0A600.book
306 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Maintenance
306
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then
turn off the engine.
u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60
seconds (less than 90 seconds).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the
transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
4. Insert the dipstick all the way back into the
Upper Mark
HOT
transmission securely, as shown in the
Lower Mark
Range
image.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid
level.
u It should be between the upper and
lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add
fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the
level between the upper and lower marks,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
307 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
NOTICE
■ Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MAX
MIN
Brake Reservoir
1Brake Fluid
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.
Maintenance
307
CR-V-31T0A600.book
308 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the
cap.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Level Gauge
Models with washer level sensor
If the washer fluid is low, the indicator appears on the instrument panel.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Maintenance
308
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
309 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1Headlight Bulbs
High/Low beam headlight: 60/55W (H4/HB2)
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
■ High/Low Beam Headlight
Rubber Weather
Seal
1. Remove the coupler.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
Coupler
Hold-down Wire
3. Remove the hold-down wire, then remove
the bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Continued
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake
lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a vehicle wash
or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Maintenance
Bulb
The H4/HB2 type is halogen bulb.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its base, and
protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
309
CR-V-31T0A600.book
310 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *
Hold-down
Wire
5. Reinstall the hold-down wire. Hook the end
of the wire on the knob in the slot.
u You can see if the hold-down wire is in
the right place from the inspection
window.
6. Reinstall the rubber weather seal.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Inspection Window
Fog Light Bulbs *
1Fog Light Bulbs *
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 55 W (H11)
Clip
Maintenance
310
* Not available on all models
1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver,
and push up the under cover.
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
311 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Marker Light Bulb
Bulb
2. Remove the coupler.
u It can be removed by pushing the tab.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert new bulb.
1Fog Light Bulbs *
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Central pin
Tab
Coupler
Side Marker Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Side Marker Light: 3 CP
Bulb
Socket
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
2. Insert a new bulb.
* Not available on all models
Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat.
311
CR-V-31T0A600.book
312 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking: 24/2.2CP
Bulb
Socket
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
2. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
3. Insert new bulb.
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn
Signal Light and Lower Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Maintenance
312
Lower Rear Side Marker/Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Back-Up Light: 21 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Bolts
1. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
313 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket
Guide
5. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it on
to the guide on the body.
Maintenance
313
CR-V-31T0A600.book
314 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuUpper Rear Side Marker/Taillight
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight: 3CP
1. Remove the lower taillight assembly.
2 Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear
Side Marker Light Bulbs P. 312
2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove
the bolt.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Bolt
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Maintenance
314
Socket
Bulb
CR-V-31T0A600.book
315 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
Rear License Plate Light: 3 CP
1. Push the left edge of the lens to the right
and pull out the licence light assembly.
2. Push the tabs to remove the lens.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Tab
Bulb
Tab
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
Maintenance
Lens
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
315
CR-V-31T0A600.book
316 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
Lock Tab
Maintenance
316
2. Push the lock tab up.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
317 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
Tab
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Maintenance
Indent
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
317
CR-V-31T0A600.book
318 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
Maintenance
3. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with
the indent.
Blade
318
2. Pull up the lock tab and release the wiper
arm.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
319 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and
mount to a new rubber blade.
Retainer
Rubber
5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.
Maintenance
319
CR-V-31T0A600.book
320 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
Maintenance
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 325
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
320
1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
321 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example
Tire Labeling
Example
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
1Tire Sizes
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
Maintenance
Maximum
Tire Load
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/70R16 100S
215: Tire width in millimeters.
70: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
100: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
S: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Continued
321
CR-V-31T0A600.book
322 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
Maintenance
322
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
CR-V-31T0A600.book
323 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Continued
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Maintenance
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
323
CR-V-31T0A600.book
324 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
324
■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
1Traction
■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
1Temperature
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
325 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
Maintenance
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
325
CR-V-31T0A600.book
326 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS, VSA® (vehicle stability assist), hill
start assist, and the AWD * system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
Maintenance
326
* Not available on all models
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
327 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display/
multi-information display * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
FRONT
Direction Mark
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
* Not available on all models
Maintenance
Front
327
CR-V-31T0A600.book
328 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked ”M+S” tires, snow
tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles
when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Maintenance
328
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1042
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
329 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Battery
Checking the Battery
Test Indicator Window
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.
1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 158
• The clock resets.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
2 Setting the Clock P. 98
• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
The test indicator's color information is on the
battery.
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the
battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
* Not available on all models
329
CR-V-31T0A600.book
330 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
Battery type: CR1616
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver. Press a button to pry
open the transmitter.
Keypad
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Screw
2. Open the keypad.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Battery
Maintenance
330
1Replacing the Button Battery
CR-V-31T0A600.book
331 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Remote Control and Wireless Headphone Care *
Models with Rear Entertainment System
Replacing the Battery
1Replacing the Battery
■ Remote Control
NOTICE
If it takes several pushes on the remote control buttons to operate the rear
entertainment system *.
Battery type: CR2025
1. Remove the cover.
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
Continued
331
CR-V-31T0A600.book
332 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuRemote Control and Wireless Headphone Care * uReplacing the Battery
■ Wireless Headphone
If there is no sound coming from the wireless headphone, replace the battery.
Battery type: AAA
1. To open the cover, insert a coin in the slot
and twist it slightly to pry the cover away
from the earpiece.
Coin
Cover
Maintenance
332
Battery
2. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
333 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */
climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
333
CR-V-31T0A600.book
334 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
Maintenance
334
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
335 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuCleaninguInterior Care
■ Floor Mats
Unlock
Lock
1Floor Mats
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
335
CR-V-31T0A600.book
336 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
■ Using an Automated Vehicle Wash
• Remove the audio antenna.
2 Audio Antenna P. 158
• Fold in the door mirrors.
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated vehicle wash.
Maintenance
336
■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
Air Intake Vents
CR-V-31T0A600.book
337 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuCleaninguExterior Care
■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels *
* Not available on all models
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Maintenance
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
1Applying Wax
337
CR-V-31T0A600.book
338
338 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
CR-V-31T0A600.book
339 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 340
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 341
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 347
Jump Starting.................................... 348
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 350
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 351
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 353
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 353
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 354
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 357
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 359
Emergency Towing........................... 360
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate.....361
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On.......355
If the EPS Indicator Comes On.......... 355
If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 356
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 356
339
CR-V-31T0A600.book
340 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
2 How to Set Up the Jack P. 344
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Jack Handle Bar
Handling the Unexpected
340
Jack
CR-V-31T0A600.book
341 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground.
2. Put the shift lever in (P .
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 .
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full size tire as soon as possible.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Handling the Unexpected
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,
as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Continued
341
CR-V-31T0A600.book
342 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the cargo area floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected
Tool Bag
2. Take the tool bag out of the cargo area.
Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle
bar out of the tool bag.
Spare Tire
3. Take the jack out of the spare tire area.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
342
CR-V-31T0A600.book
343 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
The tire to be replaced.
Wheel
Blocks
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
343
CR-V-31T0A600.book
344 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
Jack
Handle
Bar
344
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
345 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
Continued
345
CR-V-31T0A600.book
346 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Storing the Flat Tire
Wing
Bolt
Spacer
Cone
For
normal
tire
For compact spare tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench and
jack handle bar back in the tool bag. Store
the bag in the cargo area.
5. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s
end bracket to lock it in place.
■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on
while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go
off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS
indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
346
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
347 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch to START (e and check the
starter.
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 348
Checklist
Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 329
If the interior lights come on normally 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 359
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 259
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
●
2 Immobilizer System P. 112
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 79
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected
Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
1Checking the Engine
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 359
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 360
347
CR-V-31T0A600.book
348 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the assisting vehicle's + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
assisting vehicle's - terminal.
Handling the Unexpected
348
Booster Battery
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
349 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuJump Startingu
■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's +
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
349
CR-V-31T0A600.book
350 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
■ Releasing the Lock
Slot
Handling the Unexpected
Cover
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing on the key, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Release
Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
350
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver and remove the cover of the
shift lock release slot.
u Put the tip of the flat-tip screwdriver into
the slot and remove it as shown in the
image.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
351 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam is coming out of the engine compartment.
Continued
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.
Handling the Unexpected
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Move the shift lever to (P and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories
and turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. No steam coming out: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
Steam coming out: Turn off the engine and wait until steam goes away. Then,
open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
351
CR-V-31T0A600.book
352 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
■ Next thing to do
1How to Handle Overheating
MAX
Reserve
Tank
MIN
Handling the Unexpected
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,
contact a dealer for repairs.
352
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
353 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system *, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
* Not available on all models
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
Handling the Unexpected
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The light goes out: Start driving again.
u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
353
CR-V-31T0A600.book
354 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink
Handling the Unexpected
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■ Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
354
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
355 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
U.S.
Canada
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with EPS.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
1If the EPS Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.
Handling the Unexpected
If the EPS Indicator Comes On
1If the Brake System Indicator Comes On
355
CR-V-31T0A600.book
356 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator stays on for a while, and then goes off.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
If the TPMS Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
356
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.
• If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving
for a few miles (kilometers).
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire has triggered the indicator to comes on, change the tire to a
full size tire. The indicator goes off after a while.
1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
357 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
* Not available on all models
Amps
70 A
−
40 A
20 A
(30 A)
100 A
50 A
60 A
60 A
30 A
−
30 A
−
40 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
−
−
−
−
−
7.5 A
−
(7.5 A)
Circuit Protected
11
STRLD
12
Fog Lights *
13
Premium Amp *
14
Horn
15
Hazard
16
Stop
17
IG Coil
18
IGP2
19
−
20
−
21
−
22
DBW
23
IGP
24 Left Headlight Low Beam
25 Right Headlight Low Beam
26
SMALL
27
MG Clutch
28
Interior Lights
29
Backup
Amps
7.5 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
−
−
−
15 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Circuit Protected
EPS
−
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA FSR
E-DPS *
Main Fuse
IG Main
Fuse Box Main
Fuse Box Main 2
Headlight Main
−
Rear Defogger
−
Blower
Front Wiper Main
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor
−
−
−
−
−
Sub Fan Rly CL
−
Heated Door Mirror *
357
CR-V-31T0A600.book
358 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFusesuFuse Locations
■ Interior Fuse Box
10
11
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse Box
12
13
14
15
Fuse Label
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
358
16
Circuit Protected
−
ACG
SRS
Fuel Pump
Meter
Power Window
VB SOL
Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
* Not available on all models
Amps
−
10 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Circuit Protected
Amps
Trailer *
(7.5 A)
Moonroof *
(20 A)
Accessory Power Socket
(15 A)
(Center Console) *
−
−
Seat Heaters *
(20 A)
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
10 A
(Unlock)
Driver's Power Seat Sliding * (20 A)
Driver's Power Seat
(20 A)
Reclining *
−
−
ACC
7.5 A
ACC Key Lock
7.5 A
Daytime Running Lights
7.5 A
A/C
7.5 A
Rear Wiper
10 A
ABS/VSA
7.5 A
Audio
10 A
−
−
Accessory Power Socket
15 A
(Front)
Washer
15 A
ODS
7.5 A
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
10 A
(Lock) *
−
−
Circuit Protected
32 Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
33 Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
34
Small Lights
35
Illumination
36
−
37
−
38 Left Headlight High Beam
39 Right Headlight High Beam
40
TPMS
41
Door Lock
42
Driver’s Power Window
Rear Passenger’s Side
43
Power Window
Front Passenger’s Side
44
Power Window
Rear Driver’s Side Power
45
Window
46
−
Amps
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
−
−
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
−
CR-V-31T0A600.book
359 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse
Combined
Fuse
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 357 to 358.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse Puller
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 . Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
359
CR-V-31T0A600.book
360 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
2WD models
■ Wheel lift equipment
Handling the Unexpected
360
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
CR-V-31T0A600.book
361 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate.
1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
What to do-Following up
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the side using a
flat-tip screwdriver.
Handling the Unexpected
Cover
Lever
361
CR-V-31T0A600.book
362
362 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
CR-V-31T0A600.book
363 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 364
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 366
Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 366
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 369
Warranty Coverages ........................ 371
Authorized Manuals......................... 373
Customer Service Information......... 374
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 367
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 368
363
CR-V-31T0A600.book
364 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
■ Engine Specifications
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Displacement
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Information
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Honda CR-V
Spark Plugs
2
3
5
■ Fuel
*1
U.S.: 4,332 lbs (1,965 kg)
4,464 lbs (2,025 kg)*2
4,564 lbs (2,070 kg)*3
Canada: 1,965 kg*1
2,025 kg*2
2,070 kg*3
U.S.: 2,227 lbs (1,010 kg)*1
2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*2
2,326 lbs (1,055 kg)*3
Canada: 1,010 kg*1
1,030 kg*2
1,055 kg*3
U.S.: 2,150 lbs (975 kg)*1
2,238 lbs (1,015 kg)*2
2,282 lbs (1,035 kg)*3
Canada: 975 kg*1
1,015 kg*2
1,035 kg*3
HFC-134a (R-134a)
13.6 – 15.4 oz (385 – 435 g)
SP-10
*1: LX models with 2WD
*2: LX models with AWD, EX and EX-L models with 2WD
*3: EX, EX-L models with AWD and TOUR models
364
144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B-11S
DENSO
SXU22HCR11S
Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
15.3 US gal (58 ℓ)
■ Battery
Capacity/Type
36AH(5)/45AH(20)
36AH(5)/47AH(20)
38AH(5)/47AH(20)
■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (High/Low Beams)
Fog Lights
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights
Side Marker Lights
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillights
Lower Rear Side Marker/Brake/
Taillights
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light
Cargo Area Light
Vanity Mirror Lights*1
Interior Lights
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
*1: Not available on all models
60/55W (H4/HB2)
55W (H11)
24/2.2CP
3CP
3CP
21/5W
21W
21W (Amber)
LED
3CP
8W
2W
8W
8W
CR-V-31T0A600.book
365 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuSpecificationsu
■ Brake Fluid
Specified
■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity
Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
2.3 US qt (2.2 ℓ)*1
Change
2.7 US qt (2.6 ℓ)*2
*1: 2WD models
*2: AWD models
■ Rear Differential Fluid *
Specified
Capacity
Honda Dual Pump Fluid II
Change
1.32 US qt (1.247 ℓ)
Total
1.57 US qt (1.488 ℓ)
Recommended
Capacity
■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)
Change
including
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
filter
■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Capacity
Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.64 US gal (6.2 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.16 US gal (0.62 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Size
Regular
Compact
Spare
Wheel Size
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi(kPa[kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare
215/70R16 100S*1
225/65R17 102T*2
32 (220 [2.2])*1
31 (210 [2.1])*2
T155/90D17 101M
T165/80D17 104M
60 (420 [4.2])
16 x 6.5J*1
17 x 6.5J*2
17 x 4T
*1: LX
*2: EX, EX-L, TOUR
Information
* Not available on all models
365
CR-V-31T0A600.book
366 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and
transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Cover
Engine Number
Information
366
Automatic Transmission
Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
CR-V-31T0A600.book
367 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Rear Entertainment System
Rear Entertainment System Remote Control
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Information
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
367
CR-V-31T0A600.book
368 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
368
CR-V-31T0A600.book
369 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle uses "readiness codes," as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w , without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
Continued
Information
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
369
CR-V-31T0A600.book
370 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information
370
CR-V-31T0A600.book
371 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
Continued
371
CR-V-31T0A600.book
372 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2012 Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2012 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Information
372
CR-V-31T0A600.book
373 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33T0AC00
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models' or other years' manuals.
Publication
Form Number
31T0A600
31T0A800
31T0AC00
HON-R
2012 Honda CR-V Owner’s Manual
2012 Honda CR-V Navigation
System Owner’s Manual
2012 Honda CR-V Service History
2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide (LX)
2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide (EX/EX-L)
2012 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide
(EX-L/TOUR with Navigation)
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Information
31T0AM00
31T0AA00
31T0AB00
Form Description
373
CR-V-31T0A600.book
374 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Information
374
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 366
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
CR-V-31T0A600.book
375 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Index
Index
Numbers
4WD .......................................................... 270
A
General Information ................................ 210
iPod®............................................... 167, 183
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 170, 188
Pandora®................................................. 186
Reactivating ............................................ 158
Recommended CDs................................. 211
Recommended Devices............................ 213
Security Code.......................................... 158
Theft Protection ...................................... 158
USB Adapter Cable.................................. 157
USB Flash Drives ...................................... 213
Authorized Manuals ................................ 373
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 106
Customize......................................... 91, 107
Automatic Lighting .................................. 119
Automatic Transmission........................... 262
Creeping ................................................. 262
Fluid........................................................ 306
Kickdown................................................ 262
Operating the Shift Lever................... 16, 264
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 350
Shifting ................................................... 263
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 157
Average Fuel Economy ........................ 81, 84
Average Speed ........................................... 84
AWD.......................................................... 270
Index
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 275
Accessories and Modifications ................ 283
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 141
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 304
Engine Oil ............................................... 299
Washer ................................................... 308
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 299
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 137
Front Seats.............................................. 128
Head Restraints....................................... 131
Mirrors.................................................... 126
Rear Seat Back ........................................ 136
Rear Seats............................................... 135
Steering Wheel ....................................... 125
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 151
Changing the Mode................................ 151
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 152
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 333
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 151
Sensors ................................................... 154
Synchronized Mode ................................ 153
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 151
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System) ...................................... 148
Cooling ................................................... 150
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ............................................... 150
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 333
Heating ................................................... 149
Air Pressure ....................................... 321, 365
Airbags ........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision......................................... 43
Airbag Care ............................................... 53
Event Data Recorder .................................. 22
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Indicator ........................................ 50, 73, 76
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 51
Sensors...................................................... 39
Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 48
Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 52
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 49
AM/FM Radio .................................... 161, 175
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 275
Indicator .................................................... 73
Armrest ..................................................... 137
Audio Antenna ......................................... 158
Audio Remote Controls............................ 209
Audio System ............................................ 156
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 160, 174
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 157
Error Messages ........................................ 205
375
CR-V-31T0A600.book
376 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
B
Index
376
Battery....................................................... 329
Charging System Indicator ................. 71, 353
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 329
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 330
Behind a Motorhome ............................... 255
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 31
Beverage Holders...................................... 140
Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 191
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ..................... 214
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 66
Brake System............................................. 273
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 275
Brake Assist System ................................. 276
Fluid ........................................................ 307
Foot Brake ............................................... 274
Indicator ............................................ 70, 355
Parking Brake .......................................... 273
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 123
Bulb Replacement..................................... 309
Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light,
Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear
Side Marker Light.................................. 312
Fog Lights................................................ 310
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light ................ 312
Headlights ............................................... 309
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 315
Rear License Plate Light............................ 315
Side Marker Lights ................................... 311
Upper Rear Side Marker/Taillight.............. 314
Bulb Specifications ................................... 364
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 67
Cargo Hook............................................... 143
Cargo Side Net.......................................... 142
Carrying Cargo ................................. 247, 249
CD Player........................................... 163, 180
Certification Label.................................... 366
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 309
Charging System Indicator................. 71, 353
Child Safety................................................. 54
Childproof Door Locks............................. 105
Child Seat.................................................... 54
Booster Seats ............................................ 66
Child Seat for Infants................................. 56
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 57
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 62
Larger Children ......................................... 65
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 58
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 105
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 336
Cleaning the Interior................................ 334
Climate Control System............................ 151
Changing the Mode ................................ 151
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 152
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 333
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 151
Sensors ................................................... 154
Synchronized Mode ................................ 153
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 151
Clock ........................................................... 98
Coat Hook ................................................ 142
Compact Spare Tire.......................... 341, 365
Compass.................................................... 243
Console Compartment............................. 139
Controls ...................................................... 97
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 304
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 305
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 304
Overheating............................................ 351
Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 262
Cruise Control .......................................... 265
Indicator ................................................... 78
Cup Holders .............................................. 140
Customer Service Information ................ 374
Customized Features ................................. 86
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 120
Dead Battery ............................................ 348
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ......................................... 150, 152
Detachable Anchor .................................... 36
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 367
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 118
CR-V-31T0A600.book
377 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
E
Eco Assist System.......................................... 7
ECON Button ............................................ 125
Elapsed Time ............................................... 84
Electric Power Steering System (EPS)
Indicator ............................................ 75, 355
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 268
Emergency ................................................ 360
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 369
Engine ....................................................... 366
Coolant ................................................... 304
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Oil ........................................................... 299
Starting ................................................... 259
Switch Buzzer .......................................... 117
Engine Coolant ......................................... 304
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 305
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 304
Overheating ............................................ 351
Temperatue Guage.................................... 79
Engine Oil ................................................. 299
Adding .................................................... 301
Checking ................................................. 300
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 289, 293
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 70, 353
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 299
EPS (Electric Power Steering
System) .............................................. 75, 355
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 67
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 336
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 127
F
Features .................................................... 155
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 333
Oil........................................................... 302
Flat Tire ..................................................... 341
Floor Mats................................................. 335
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 306
Brake ...................................................... 307
Engine Coolant ....................................... 304
Windshield Washer ................................. 308
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 76
Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 135
Foot Brake ................................................ 274
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 42
Front Seats ................................................ 128
Adjusting ................................................ 128
Fuel...................................................... 17, 279
Economy ................................................. 282
Gauge....................................................... 79
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Range ................................................. 81, 84
Recommendation .................................... 279
Refueling................................................. 279
Fuel Economy ........................................... 282
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 17, 281
Message.................................................. 354
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 17, 280
Index
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 126
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 300
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 118
Display Button............................................ 83
Door Mirrors............................................. 127
Doors ........................................................ 100
Auto Door Locking.................................. 106
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 106
Door Open Indicator ........................... 30, 74
Keys........................................................ 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside .................................................... 104
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................. 102
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 103
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 323
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support ................. 128
Driving ...................................................... 245
Automatic Transmission .......................... 262
Braking ................................................... 273
Cruise Control ........................................ 265
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines .............. 257
Shifting Gear .......................................... 263
Starting the Engine ................................. 259
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 333
DVD Player ............................................... 193
377
CR-V-31T0A600.book
378 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Fuses .......................................................... 357
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 359
Locations ......................................... 357, 358
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 282
Gauge ....................................................... 79
Information ............................................. 279
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Refueling ................................................. 279
Gauges......................................................... 79
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........................... 263
Glass (care) ................................................ 337
Glove Box .................................................. 139
H
Index
378
Halogen Bulbs................................... 309, 310
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 339
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ............................... 214
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
and Call History ..................................... 230
Automatic Transferring ............................ 228
Caller’s ID Information ............................. 228
HFL Buttons ............................................. 214
HFL Menus .............................................. 216
HFL Status Display.................................... 215
Making a Call .......................................... 233
Options During a Call .............................. 237
Phone Setup............................................ 221
Receiving a Call ....................................... 236
Speed Dial............................................... 231
Text Message .................................. 226, 238
To Clear the System ................................ 229
To Create a Security PIN .......................... 227
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2
Head Restraints ........................................ 131
Headlights................................................. 118
Aiming .................................................... 309
Automatic Operation............................... 119
Dimming ......................................... 118, 120
Operating................................................ 118
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 145
Heating and Cooling System ................... 148
Cooling ................................................... 150
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 150
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 333
Heating ................................................... 149
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 214
High Beam Indicator .................................. 76
Hill Start Assist System ............................. 260
I
Identification Numbers ............................
Engine and Transmission .........................
Vehicle Identification ...............................
Ignition Switch .........................................
366
366
366
117
Illumination Control ................................ 123
Knob ...................................................... 123
Immobilizer System.................................. 112
Indicator ................................................... 77
Indicators.................................................... 70
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................... 73
AWD System............................................. 73
Charging System............................... 71, 353
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 78, 266
CRUISE MAIN.................................... 78, 265
Door Open.......................................... 30, 74
ECON Mode ..................................... 77, 125
EPS (Electric Power Steering
System) ........................................... 75, 355
Fog Light .................................................. 76
High Beam................................................ 76
Immobilizer System ................................... 77
Lights On .................................................. 76
Low Fuel ................................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure ............................... 70, 353
Low Tire Pressure ...................... 75, 270, 271
Maintenance Minder......................... 78, 289
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 71, 354
Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 70, 355
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 32, 72
Security System Alarm............................... 77
Shift Lever Position.................................... 71
Side Airbag Off ................................... 52, 76
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 50, 73
Tailgate Open ........................................... 74
TPMS ................................................ 75, 272
CR-V-31T0A600.book
379 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Transmission ............................................. 72
Turn Signal ............................................... 76
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 74, 268
VSA® OFF.......................................... 74, 269
Washer Level ............................................ 78
Information .............................................. 363
Information Display ................................... 80
Instrument Panel........................................ 69
Brightness Control .................................. 123
Interior Lights........................................... 138
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 126
iPod® ................................................. 167, 183
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 344
Jump Starting........................................... 348
K
101
103
100
103
100
101
105
102
100
101
L
Language (HFL)......................................... 215
LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 59, 63
Lights................................................. 118, 309
Automatic ............................................... 119
Bulb Replacement.................................... 309
Daytime Running Lights ........................... 120
Fog Lights................................................ 120
High Beam Indicator .................................. 76
Interior .................................................... 138
Light Switches ......................................... 118
Lights On Indicator .................................... 76
Turn Signals............................................. 118
Load Limits ................................................ 249
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 100
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 106
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 105
From Inside.............................................. 104
From Outside........................................... 102
Keys ........................................................ 100
Using a Key ............................................. 103
Lockout Prevention System...................... 103
Low Battery Charge.................................. 353
Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 353
Lower Anchors ...................................... 59, 63
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 249
M
Maintenance............................................. 285
Battery .................................................... 329
Brake Fluid .............................................. 307
Cleaning ................................................. 334
Climate Control System........................... 333
Coolant................................................... 304
Heating and Cooling System ................... 333
Maintenance Minder™ ........................... 289
Oil........................................................... 300
Precautions ............................................. 286
Radiator .................................................. 305
Remote Control....................................... 331
Remote Transmitter................................. 330
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 309
Safety...................................................... 287
Service Items ................................... 291, 295
Tires ........................................................ 320
Transmission Fluid ................................... 306
Under the Hood ...................................... 297
Wireless Headphone................................ 332
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 71, 354
Map Lights ................................................ 138
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 249
Meters, Gauges........................................... 79
Mirrors ...................................................... 126
Adjusting ................................................ 126
Door ....................................................... 127
Exterior ................................................... 127
Interior Rearview ..................................... 126
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 283
Index
Key Number Tag ......................................
Keyless Lockout Prevention.....................
Keys...........................................................
Lockout Prevention .................................
Master Keys ............................................
Number Tag............................................
Rear Door Won’t Open ...........................
Remote Transmitter ................................
Types and Functions................................
Valet Key ................................................
Won’t Turn................................................ 20
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 262
379
CR-V-31T0A600.book
380 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Moonroof.................................................. 116
MP3.................................... 163, 170, 180, 188
Multi-Information Display.......................... 83
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 278
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 366
O
Index
Odometer.................................................... 80
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines.............. 257
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 299
Adding .................................................... 301
Checking ................................................. 300
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 289, 293
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 70, 353
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 299
Viscosity .................................................. 299
Opening/Closing
Hood ....................................................... 298
Moonroof................................................ 116
Power Windows ...................................... 114
Tailgate ................................................... 110
Outside Temperature ................................. 82
Adusting.................................................... 82
Overheating .............................................. 351
P
Pandora® ................................................... 186
380
Panic Mode ............................................... 113
Parking...................................................... 277
Parking Brake ........................................... 273
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator............................................ 70, 355
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 51
Passing Indicators ..................................... 118
Power Windows ....................................... 114
Precautions While Driving ....................... 261
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle .................................................. 261
Rain ........................................................ 261
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 341
R
Radiator .................................................... 305
Radio (AM/FM) ................................. 161, 175
Radio (XM®) .............................................. 178
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 162, 177
Range .................................................... 81, 84
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 162, 177
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 369
REAL TIME AWD with Intelligent Control
System™.................................................. 270
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 124
Rear Entertainment System ..................... 193
Rear Seat Back .......................................... 136
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 135
Rearview Camera ..................................... 278
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 126
Refueling .................................................. 279
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 79
Gasoline ......................................... 279, 364
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Regulations .............................. 271, 323, 367
Remote Transmitter ................................. 102
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 330
Bulbs ...................................................... 309
Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 316
Fuses .............................................. 357, 358
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 318
Tires........................................................ 326
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 368
Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 81
S
Safe Driving................................................
Safety Check...............................................
Safety Labels ..............................................
Safety Message ..........................................
Seat Belts ....................................................
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .................
Checking ..................................................
Detachable Anchor ...................................
Fastening ..................................................
25
30
68
23
31
35
33
38
36
34
CR-V-31T0A600.book
381 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
SMS Text Message ............................ 226, 238
Snow Tires................................................. 328
Spare Tire .......................................... 341, 365
Spark Plugs................................................ 364
Specifications ............................................ 364
Specified Fuel.................................... 279, 364
Speedometer .............................................. 79
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 42
Starting the Engine .................................. 259
Does Not Start ......................................... 347
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 117
Jump Starting .......................................... 348
Steering Wheel ......................................... 125
Adjusting................................................. 125
Stopping.................................................... 277
Summer Tires ............................................ 328
Sunglasses Holder ..................................... 144
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 42
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 2, 3, 117
Synchronized Mode.................................. 153
T
Tachometer ................................................. 79
Tailgate ..................................................... 110
Unable to Open ....................................... 361
Temperature Gauge ................................... 79
Temperature Sensor ................................. 154
Text Message .................................... 226, 238
Time (Setting) ............................................. 98
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 270
Indicator............................................ 75, 356
Tires........................................................... 320
Air Pressure ..................................... 321, 365
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 320
Inspection ............................................... 320
Labeling .................................................. 321
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 341
Regulations ............................................. 323
Rotation .................................................. 327
Spare Tire........................................ 341, 365
Summer .................................................. 328
Tire Chains .............................................. 328
Wear Indicators ....................................... 325
Winter..................................................... 328
Tonneau Cover ......................................... 146
Tools.......................................................... 340
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 251
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 252
Load Limits.............................................. 251
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 255
Behind a Motorhome .............................. 255
Emergency .............................................. 360
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 270
Indicator............................................ 75, 356
Index
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt ................................................. 62
Pregnant Women...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 32
Warning Indicator ............................... 32, 72
Seat Heaters ............................................. 145
Seats.......................................................... 128
Adjusting ................................................ 128
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support.................. 128
Front Seats.............................................. 128
Rear Seats............................................... 135
Seat Heaters ........................................... 145
Security System ........................................ 112
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 77
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 77
SEL/RESET Knob.................................... 80, 83
Select Lever ........................................ 16, 263
Operation ......................................... 16, 264
Releasing ................................................ 350
Won’t Move ........................................... 350
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58
Selector Knob (Audio) ..................... 159, 173
Setting the Clock........................................ 98
Shift Lever .......................................... 16, 263
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 71, 264
Shifting (Transmission) ............................ 263
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 35
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Cutoff System........................................... 48
Off Indicator ............................................. 48
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 49
381
CR-V-31T0A600.book
382 ページ
２０１１年８月８日 月曜日 午後６時２６分
Transmission.............................................. 263
Automatic ............................................... 263
Fluid ........................................................ 306
Number ................................................... 366
Shift Lever Position Indicator .............. 71, 264
Trip Meter ................................................... 81
Troubleshooting ....................................... 339
Blown Fuse ...................................... 357, 358
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 20
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 21
Emergency Towing .................................. 360
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 347
Noise When Braking .................................. 21
Overheating............................................. 351
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 341
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 20, 105
Select Lever Won’t Move ......................... 350
Warning Indicators .................................... 70
Turn Signals............................................... 118
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 76
U
Index
382
Unlocking the Doors................................. 102
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside ......................................................... 11
USB Adapter Cable ........................... 156, 157
USB Flash Drives........................................ 213
V
Valet Key................................................... 101
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 366
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 268
Off Button............................................... 269
Off Indicator.............................................. 74
System Indicator........................................ 74
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 299, 365
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 268
Winter Tires.............................................. 328
Snow Tires .............................................. 328
Tire Chains.............................................. 328
Wipers and Washers ................................ 121
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 316
Front....................................................... 121
Rear........................................................ 122
WMA................................. 163, 170, 180, 188
Worn Tires ................................................ 320
X
W
Wallpaper ................................................... 92
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 353
Warning Labels........................................... 68
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 371
Watts......................................................... 364
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 325
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 344
Window Washers ..................................... 121
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 308
Switch..................................................... 121
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 114
Windshield................................................ 121
Cleaning ................................................. 337
Defrosting/Defogging...................... 150, 152
Washer Fluid ........................................... 308
Wiper Blades ........................................... 316
Wipers and Washers................................ 121
XM® Radio ................................................ 178
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Page Mode : UseNone XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39 Format : application/pdf Title : Creator : Create Date : 2011:08:08 17:32:18Z Creator Tool : FrameMaker 9.0 Modify Date : 2011:10:18 11:22:58-07:00 Metadata Date : 2011:10:18 11:22:58-07:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows) Document ID : uuid:69620378-cee5-44b3-8525-4c16b1ba7989 Instance ID : uuid:17ed3c24-10a9-478b-9fc2-72aa170e520a Has XFA : No Page Count : 384EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools